WO2023023561A1 - Multiplex binding assays with optical nanopore readout - Google Patents
Multiplex binding assays with optical nanopore readout Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2023023561A1 WO2023023561A1 PCT/US2022/075093 US2022075093W WO2023023561A1 WO 2023023561 A1 WO2023023561 A1 WO 2023023561A1 US 2022075093 W US2022075093 W US 2022075093W WO 2023023561 A1 WO2023023561 A1 WO 2023023561A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- binding
- fluorescently labeled
- strand
- reaction
- passage
- Prior art date
Links
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 title abstract description 6
- 238000000159 protein binding assay Methods 0.000 title description 4
- 102000040430 polynucleotide Human genes 0.000 claims abstract description 214
- 108091033319 polynucleotide Proteins 0.000 claims abstract description 214
- 239000002157 polynucleotide Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 214
- 238000009739 binding Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 180
- 230000027455 binding Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 179
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 claims abstract description 79
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 65
- 238000012163 sequencing technique Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 31
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 claims description 144
- 230000005284 excitation Effects 0.000 claims description 105
- 239000002773 nucleotide Substances 0.000 claims description 104
- 125000003729 nucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 100
- 108091034117 Oligonucleotide Proteins 0.000 claims description 79
- 239000007850 fluorescent dye Substances 0.000 claims description 41
- 239000011541 reaction mixture Substances 0.000 claims description 16
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 claims description 11
- 230000001902 propagating effect Effects 0.000 claims description 5
- 239000011230 binding agent Substances 0.000 abstract description 4
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 242
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 123
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 95
- 108060002716 Exonuclease Proteins 0.000 description 94
- 102000013165 exonuclease Human genes 0.000 description 94
- 108090000623 proteins and genes Proteins 0.000 description 55
- 239000000562 conjugate Substances 0.000 description 53
- 108020004414 DNA Proteins 0.000 description 49
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 description 40
- 102000004169 proteins and genes Human genes 0.000 description 40
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 39
- 150000007523 nucleic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 38
- 102000039446 nucleic acids Human genes 0.000 description 37
- 108020004707 nucleic acids Proteins 0.000 description 37
- 235000018102 proteins Nutrition 0.000 description 37
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 34
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 34
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 34
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 32
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 31
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical compound [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 31
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 31
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 30
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 29
- PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerine Chemical compound OCC(O)CO PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 27
- 239000002105 nanoparticle Substances 0.000 description 27
- 229910052581 Si3N4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 26
- HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon nitride Chemical compound N12[Si]34N5[Si]62N3[Si]51N64 HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 26
- 239000000427 antigen Substances 0.000 description 24
- 108091007433 antigens Proteins 0.000 description 23
- 102000036639 antigens Human genes 0.000 description 23
- JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N [3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-hydroxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methyl [5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)-2-(hydroxymethyl)oxolan-3-yl] hydrogen phosphate Polymers Cc1cn(C2CC(OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)C(COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3CO)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)O2)c(=O)[nH]c1=O JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 21
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 19
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 19
- 239000012528 membrane Substances 0.000 description 19
- 238000010791 quenching Methods 0.000 description 18
- 230000000171 quenching effect Effects 0.000 description 18
- 108010068698 spleen exonuclease Proteins 0.000 description 18
- -1 such as Proteins 0.000 description 18
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 17
- 108010014303 DNA-directed DNA polymerase Proteins 0.000 description 16
- 102000016928 DNA-directed DNA polymerase Human genes 0.000 description 16
- FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium chloride Chemical compound [Na+].[Cl-] FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 16
- 238000003776 cleavage reaction Methods 0.000 description 16
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 16
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 14
- 230000007017 scission Effects 0.000 description 14
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 description 13
- 230000001404 mediated effect Effects 0.000 description 13
- 108090000765 processed proteins & peptides Proteins 0.000 description 13
- PYWVYCXTNDRMGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodamine B Chemical compound [Cl-].C=12C=CC(=[N+](CC)CC)C=C2OC2=CC(N(CC)CC)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1C(O)=O PYWVYCXTNDRMGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 13
- 229920002477 rna polymer Polymers 0.000 description 13
- YBJHBAHKTGYVGT-ZKWXMUAHSA-N (+)-Biotin Chemical group N1C(=O)N[C@@H]2[C@H](CCCCC(=O)O)SC[C@@H]21 YBJHBAHKTGYVGT-ZKWXMUAHSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 102000053602 DNA Human genes 0.000 description 12
- 239000012790 adhesive layer Substances 0.000 description 12
- 125000005647 linker group Chemical group 0.000 description 12
- 108010021625 Immunoglobulin Fragments Proteins 0.000 description 11
- 102000008394 Immunoglobulin Fragments Human genes 0.000 description 11
- 108010010677 Phosphodiesterase I Proteins 0.000 description 11
- 230000021615 conjugation Effects 0.000 description 11
- 230000029087 digestion Effects 0.000 description 11
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 11
- 102000004196 processed proteins & peptides Human genes 0.000 description 11
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 11
- 229910052770 Uranium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 10
- 238000009396 hybridization Methods 0.000 description 10
- 238000002823 phage display Methods 0.000 description 10
- 229920001184 polypeptide Polymers 0.000 description 10
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 10
- 241000588724 Escherichia coli Species 0.000 description 9
- 239000003153 chemical reaction reagent Substances 0.000 description 9
- 108060003951 Immunoglobulin Proteins 0.000 description 8
- 108010090804 Streptavidin Proteins 0.000 description 8
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 8
- 229960002685 biotin Drugs 0.000 description 8
- 239000011616 biotin Substances 0.000 description 8
- VHJLVAABSRFDPM-QWWZWVQMSA-N dithiothreitol Chemical compound SC[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)CS VHJLVAABSRFDPM-QWWZWVQMSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 239000000975 dye Substances 0.000 description 8
- 102000018358 immunoglobulin Human genes 0.000 description 8
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 8
- 239000011780 sodium chloride Substances 0.000 description 8
- LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylene glycol Chemical group OCCO LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 238000003556 assay Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000000231 atomic layer deposition Methods 0.000 description 7
- FOYVTVSSAMSORJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N atto 655 Chemical compound OC(=O)CCCN1C(C)(C)CC(CS([O-])(=O)=O)C2=C1C=C1OC3=CC4=[N+](CC)CCCC4=CC3=NC1=C2 FOYVTVSSAMSORJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 7
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 7
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000001226 triphosphate Substances 0.000 description 7
- 102000004190 Enzymes Human genes 0.000 description 6
- 108090000790 Enzymes Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 241000724791 Filamentous phage Species 0.000 description 6
- GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titan oxide Chemical compound O=[Ti]=O GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 235000020958 biotin Nutrition 0.000 description 6
- 239000011651 chromium Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000005684 electric field Effects 0.000 description 6
- GNBHRKFJIUUOQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluorescein Chemical compound O1C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2C21C1=CC=C(O)C=C1OC1=CC(O)=CC=C21 GNBHRKFJIUUOQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 238000010884 ion-beam technique Methods 0.000 description 6
- 239000000178 monomer Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000000149 penetrating effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000010076 replication Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000000377 silicon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000009870 specific binding Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229920001213 Polysorbate 20 Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 125000003275 alpha amino acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 239000012634 fragment Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229940072221 immunoglobulins Drugs 0.000 description 5
- 238000011068 loading method Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 5
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 5
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000013612 plasmid Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000000256 polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate Substances 0.000 description 5
- 235000010486 polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 239000011535 reaction buffer Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000011160 research Methods 0.000 description 5
- ABZLKHKQJHEPAX-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetramethylrhodamine Chemical compound C=12C=CC(N(C)C)=CC2=[O+]C2=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1C([O-])=O ABZLKHKQJHEPAX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 235000011178 triphosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 241001515965 unidentified phage Species 0.000 description 5
- 239000013598 vector Substances 0.000 description 5
- VGIRNWJSIRVFRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2',7'-difluorofluorescein Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C1=C2C=C(F)C(=O)C=C2OC2=CC(O)=C(F)C=C21 VGIRNWJSIRVFRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- QKNYBSVHEMOAJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-amino-2-(hydroxymethyl)propane-1,3-diol;hydron;chloride Chemical compound Cl.OCC(N)(CO)CO QKNYBSVHEMOAJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 101710132601 Capsid protein Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 101710094648 Coat protein Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 108010017826 DNA Polymerase I Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 102000004594 DNA Polymerase I Human genes 0.000 description 4
- 102000004163 DNA-directed RNA polymerases Human genes 0.000 description 4
- 108090000626 DNA-directed RNA polymerases Proteins 0.000 description 4
- UQSXHKLRYXJYBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Iron oxide Chemical compound [Fe]=O UQSXHKLRYXJYBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 101710125418 Major capsid protein Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 101710141454 Nucleoprotein Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 229910019142 PO4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 101710083689 Probable capsid protein Proteins 0.000 description 4
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 108010006785 Taq Polymerase Proteins 0.000 description 4
- IQFYYKKMVGJFEH-XLPZGREQSA-N Thymidine Chemical compound O=C1NC(=O)C(C)=CN1[C@@H]1O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)C1 IQFYYKKMVGJFEH-XLPZGREQSA-N 0.000 description 4
- DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-XVFCMESISA-N Uridine Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-XVFCMESISA-N 0.000 description 4
- OIRDTQYFTABQOQ-KQYNXXCUSA-N adenosine Chemical compound C1=NC=2C(N)=NC=NC=2N1[C@@H]1O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O OIRDTQYFTABQOQ-KQYNXXCUSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000012491 analyte Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000012062 aqueous buffer Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000011324 bead Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000000502 dialysis Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000000609 electron-beam lithography Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000002255 enzymatic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000007672 fourth generation sequencing Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000001307 helium Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910052734 helium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 238000013537 high throughput screening Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000011534 incubation Methods 0.000 description 4
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 238000002372 labelling Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000035772 mutation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229940031182 nanoparticles iron oxide Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 235000021317 phosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 229920001223 polyethylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910052709 silver Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000012798 spherical particle Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000010936 titanium Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- AHCYMLUZIRLXAA-SHYZEUOFSA-N Deoxyuridine 5'-triphosphate Chemical class O1[C@H](COP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(O)=O)[C@@H](O)C[C@@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 AHCYMLUZIRLXAA-SHYZEUOFSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000002965 ELISA Methods 0.000 description 3
- 102100031780 Endonuclease Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 102100021181 Golgi phosphoprotein 3 Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 241000700721 Hepatitis B virus Species 0.000 description 3
- XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Iron Chemical compound [Fe] XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000002202 Polyethylene glycol Substances 0.000 description 3
- PZBFGYYEXUXCOF-UHFFFAOYSA-N TCEP Chemical compound OC(=O)CCP(CCC(O)=O)CCC(O)=O PZBFGYYEXUXCOF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium Chemical compound [Ti] RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- PNEYBMLMFCGWSK-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium oxide Inorganic materials [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Al+3].[Al+3] PNEYBMLMFCGWSK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000003321 amplification Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000000890 antigenic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000012472 biological sample Substances 0.000 description 3
- 235000012745 brilliant blue FCF Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 229910052802 copper Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000010949 copper Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000009260 cross reactivity Effects 0.000 description 3
- RGWHQCVHVJXOKC-SHYZEUOFSA-J dCTP(4-) Chemical class O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1[C@@H]1O[C@H](COP([O-])(=O)OP([O-])(=O)OP([O-])([O-])=O)[C@@H](O)C1 RGWHQCVHVJXOKC-SHYZEUOFSA-J 0.000 description 3
- 230000007613 environmental effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 108010052305 exodeoxyribonuclease III Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000001917 fluorescence detection Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 3
- 108020001507 fusion proteins Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102000037865 fusion proteins Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910001922 gold oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 230000002209 hydrophobic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000001900 immune effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 208000015181 infectious disease Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N nickel Substances [Ni] PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000003199 nucleic acid amplification method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 150000004713 phosphodiesters Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000011002 quantification Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000002096 quantum dot Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000002702 ribosome display Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000001542 size-exclusion chromatography Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000001225 therapeutic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 150000003573 thiols Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 230000003612 virological effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000001429 visible spectrum Methods 0.000 description 3
- QGKMIGUHVLGJBR-UHFFFAOYSA-M (4z)-1-(3-methylbutyl)-4-[[1-(3-methylbutyl)quinolin-1-ium-4-yl]methylidene]quinoline;iodide Chemical compound [I-].C12=CC=CC=C2N(CCC(C)C)C=CC1=CC1=CC=[N+](CCC(C)C)C2=CC=CC=C12 QGKMIGUHVLGJBR-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- YKBGVTZYEHREMT-KVQBGUIXSA-N 2'-deoxyguanosine Chemical compound C1=NC=2C(=O)NC(N)=NC=2N1[C@H]1C[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O1 YKBGVTZYEHREMT-KVQBGUIXSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KXSKAZFMTGADIV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[3-(2-hydroxyethoxy)propoxy]ethanol Chemical compound OCCOCCCOCCO KXSKAZFMTGADIV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IOOMXAQUNPWDLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[6-(diethylamino)-3-(diethyliminiumyl)-3h-xanthen-9-yl]-5-sulfobenzene-1-sulfonate Chemical compound C=12C=CC(=[N+](CC)CC)C=C2OC2=CC(N(CC)CC)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=C(S(O)(=O)=O)C=C1S([O-])(=O)=O IOOMXAQUNPWDLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IKRZCYCTPYDXML-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-hydroxypropane-1,2,3-tricarboxylic acid;hydrochloride Chemical compound Cl.OC(=O)CC(O)(C(O)=O)CC(O)=O IKRZCYCTPYDXML-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- OALHHIHQOFIMEF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3',6'-dihydroxy-2',4',5',7'-tetraiodo-3h-spiro[2-benzofuran-1,9'-xanthene]-3-one Chemical compound O1C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2C21C1=CC(I)=C(O)C(I)=C1OC1=C(I)C(O)=C(I)C=C21 OALHHIHQOFIMEF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CKTSBUTUHBMZGZ-ULQXZJNLSA-N 4-amino-1-[(2r,4s,5r)-4-hydroxy-5-(hydroxymethyl)oxolan-2-yl]-5-tritiopyrimidin-2-one Chemical compound O=C1N=C(N)C([3H])=CN1[C@@H]1O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)C1 CKTSBUTUHBMZGZ-ULQXZJNLSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IKYJCHYORFJFRR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Alexa Fluor 350 Chemical compound O=C1OC=2C=C(N)C(S(O)(=O)=O)=CC=2C(C)=C1CC(=O)ON1C(=O)CCC1=O IKYJCHYORFJFRR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JLDSMZIBHYTPPR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Alexa Fluor 405 Chemical compound CC[NH+](CC)CC.CC[NH+](CC)CC.CC[NH+](CC)CC.C12=C3C=4C=CC2=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C1=CC=C3C(S(=O)(=O)[O-])=CC=4OCC(=O)N(CC1)CCC1C(=O)ON1C(=O)CCC1=O JLDSMZIBHYTPPR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WEJVZSAYICGDCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Alexa Fluor 430 Chemical compound CC[NH+](CC)CC.CC1(C)C=C(CS([O-])(=O)=O)C2=CC=3C(C(F)(F)F)=CC(=O)OC=3C=C2N1CCCCCC(=O)ON1C(=O)CCC1=O WEJVZSAYICGDCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000012103 Alexa Fluor 488 Substances 0.000 description 2
- WHVNXSBKJGAXKU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Alexa Fluor 532 Chemical compound [H+].[H+].CC1(C)C(C)NC(C(=C2OC3=C(C=4C(C(C(C)N=4)(C)C)=CC3=3)S([O-])(=O)=O)S([O-])(=O)=O)=C1C=C2C=3C(C=C1)=CC=C1C(=O)ON1C(=O)CCC1=O WHVNXSBKJGAXKU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ZAINTDRBUHCDPZ-UHFFFAOYSA-M Alexa Fluor 546 Chemical compound [H+].[Na+].CC1CC(C)(C)NC(C(=C2OC3=C(C4=NC(C)(C)CC(C)C4=CC3=3)S([O-])(=O)=O)S([O-])(=O)=O)=C1C=C2C=3C(C(=C(Cl)C=1Cl)C(O)=O)=C(Cl)C=1SCC(=O)NCCCCCC(=O)ON1C(=O)CCC1=O ZAINTDRBUHCDPZ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- IGAZHQIYONOHQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Alexa Fluor 555 Chemical compound C=12C=CC(=N)C(S(O)(=O)=O)=C2OC2=C(S(O)(=O)=O)C(N)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=C(C(O)=O)C=C1C(O)=O IGAZHQIYONOHQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108091023037 Aptamer Proteins 0.000 description 2
- XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Argon Chemical compound [Ar] XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108090001008 Avidin Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108091003079 Bovine Serum Albumin Proteins 0.000 description 2
- ZUHQCDZJPTXVCU-UHFFFAOYSA-N C1#CCCC2=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21 Chemical compound C1#CCCC2=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21 ZUHQCDZJPTXVCU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chromium Chemical compound [Cr] VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000001712 DNA sequencing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 108010007577 Exodeoxyribonuclease I Proteins 0.000 description 2
- ZHNUHDYFZUAESO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Formamide Chemical compound NC=O ZHNUHDYFZUAESO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 101000693243 Homo sapiens Paternally-expressed gene 3 protein Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108010067060 Immunoglobulin Variable Region Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000017727 Immunoglobulin Variable Region Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108090001090 Lectins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000004856 Lectins Human genes 0.000 description 2
- TWRXJAOTZQYOKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L Magnesium chloride Chemical compound [Mg+2].[Cl-].[Cl-] TWRXJAOTZQYOKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- CSNNHWWHGAXBCP-UHFFFAOYSA-L Magnesium sulfate Chemical compound [Mg+2].[O-][S+2]([O-])([O-])[O-] CSNNHWWHGAXBCP-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 108091028043 Nucleic acid sequence Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102100025757 Paternally-expressed gene 3 protein Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010092799 RNA-directed DNA polymerase Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 240000004808 Saccharomyces cerevisiae Species 0.000 description 2
- BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silver Chemical compound [Ag] BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FOIXSVOLVBLSDH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silver ion Chemical compound [Ag+] FOIXSVOLVBLSDH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108020004682 Single-Stranded DNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- GYDJEQRTZSCIOI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tranexamic acid Chemical compound NCC1CCC(C(O)=O)CC1 GYDJEQRTZSCIOI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ISAKRJDGNUQOIC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Uracil Chemical compound O=C1C=CNC(=O)N1 ISAKRJDGNUQOIC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000000539 amino acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002819 bacterial display Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001580 bacterial effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-PSQAKQOGSA-N beta-L-uridine Natural products O[C@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](CO)O[C@@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-PSQAKQOGSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229940098773 bovine serum albumin Drugs 0.000 description 2
- DEGAKNSWVGKMLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N calcein Chemical compound O1C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2C21C1=CC(CN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O)=C(O)C=C1OC1=C2C=C(CN(CC(O)=O)CC(=O)O)C(O)=C1 DEGAKNSWVGKMLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052804 chromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 2
- OPTASPLRGRRNAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N cytosine Chemical compound NC=1C=CNC(=O)N=1 OPTASPLRGRRNAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- SUYVUBYJARFZHO-RRKCRQDMSA-N dATP Chemical class C1=NC=2C(N)=NC=NC=2N1[C@H]1C[C@H](O)[C@@H](COP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(O)=O)O1 SUYVUBYJARFZHO-RRKCRQDMSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HAAZLUGHYHWQIW-KVQBGUIXSA-N dGTP Chemical class C1=NC=2C(=O)NC(N)=NC=2N1[C@H]1C[C@H](O)[C@@H](COP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(O)=O)O1 HAAZLUGHYHWQIW-KVQBGUIXSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 235000013365 dairy product Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 238000006731 degradation reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229940079593 drug Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000005370 electroosmosis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000001704 evaporation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008020 evaporation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002349 favourable effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229960002143 fluorescein Drugs 0.000 description 2
- MHMNJMPURVTYEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluorescein-5-isothiocyanate Chemical compound O1C(=O)C2=CC(N=C=S)=CC=C2C21C1=CC=C(O)C=C1OC1=CC(O)=CC=C21 MHMNJMPURVTYEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000004927 fusion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001415 gene therapy Methods 0.000 description 2
- UYTPUPDQBNUYGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N guanine Chemical compound O=C1NC(N)=NC2=C1N=CN2 UYTPUPDQBNUYGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- SWQJXJOGLNCZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-N helium atom Chemical compound [He] SWQJXJOGLNCZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000007654 immersion Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002458 infectious effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001788 irregular Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000002523 lectin Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000003446 ligand Substances 0.000 description 2
- KWGKDLIKAYFUFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M lithium chloride Chemical compound [Li+].[Cl-] KWGKDLIKAYFUFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 238000004518 low pressure chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 2
- 235000013372 meat Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000003801 milling Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000002086 nanomaterial Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052759 nickel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 230000009871 nonspecific binding Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229960002378 oftasceine Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 230000003647 oxidation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007254 oxidation reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-K phosphate Chemical compound [O-]P([O-])([O-])=O NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 2
- 239000010452 phosphate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000008363 phosphate buffer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000003013 phosphoric acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 108020003175 receptors Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000005962 receptors Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 239000001022 rhodamine dye Substances 0.000 description 2
- XLXOKMFKGASILN-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodamine red-X Chemical compound C=12C=CC(=[N+](CC)CC)C=C2OC2=CC(N(CC)CC)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=C(S(=O)(=O)NCCCCCC(O)=O)C=C1S([O-])(=O)=O XLXOKMFKGASILN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960004641 rituximab Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 150000003839 salts Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000012216 screening Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000004332 silver Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000010944 silver (metal) Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000001488 sodium phosphate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910000162 sodium phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000012064 sodium phosphate buffer Substances 0.000 description 2
- JJAHTWIKCUJRDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N succinimidyl 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxylate Chemical compound C1CC(CN2C(C=CC2=O)=O)CCC1C(=O)ON1C(=O)CCC1=O JJAHTWIKCUJRDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 235000000346 sugar Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 230000008093 supporting effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002194 synthesizing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- MPLHNVLQVRSVEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N texas red Chemical compound [O-]S(=O)(=O)C1=CC(S(Cl)(=O)=O)=CC=C1C(C1=CC=2CCCN3CCCC(C=23)=C1O1)=C2C1=C(CCC1)C3=[N+]1CCCC3=C2 MPLHNVLQVRSVEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000003396 thiol group Chemical group [H]S* 0.000 description 2
- RWQNBRDOKXIBIV-UHFFFAOYSA-N thymine Chemical compound CC1=CNC(=O)NC1=O RWQNBRDOKXIBIV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- RYFMWSXOAZQYPI-UHFFFAOYSA-K trisodium phosphate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O RYFMWSXOAZQYPI-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 2
- 238000011144 upstream manufacturing Methods 0.000 description 2
- DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N uracil arabinoside Natural products OC1C(O)C(CO)OC1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229940045145 uridine Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000011534 wash buffer Substances 0.000 description 2
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-beta-D-Xylofuranosyl-NH-Cytosine Natural products O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1C1C(O)C(O)C(CO)O1 UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VGONTNSXDCQUGY-RRKCRQDMSA-N 2'-deoxyinosine Chemical compound C1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1N1C(N=CNC2=O)=C2N=C1 VGONTNSXDCQUGY-RRKCRQDMSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GVJXGCIPWAVXJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,5-dioxo-1-oxoniopyrrolidine-3-sulfonate Chemical compound ON1C(=O)CC(S(O)(=O)=O)C1=O GVJXGCIPWAVXJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JKMHFZQWWAIEOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[4-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazin-1-yl]ethanesulfonic acid Chemical compound OCC[NH+]1CCN(CCS([O-])(=O)=O)CC1 JKMHFZQWWAIEOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DVLFYONBTKHTER-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(N-morpholino)propanesulfonic acid Chemical compound OS(=O)(=O)CCCN1CCOCC1 DVLFYONBTKHTER-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FPQQSJJWHUJYPU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(dimethylamino)propyliminomethylidene-ethylazanium;chloride Chemical compound Cl.CCN=C=NCCCN(C)C FPQQSJJWHUJYPU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-M Acetate Chemical compound CC([O-])=O QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229930024421 Adenine Natural products 0.000 description 1
- GFFGJBXGBJISGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Adenine Chemical compound NC1=NC=NC2=C1N=CN2 GFFGJBXGBJISGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000012104 Alexa Fluor 500 Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012105 Alexa Fluor 514 Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012109 Alexa Fluor 568 Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012110 Alexa Fluor 594 Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012111 Alexa Fluor 610 Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012112 Alexa Fluor 633 Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012113 Alexa Fluor 635 Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012114 Alexa Fluor 647 Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012115 Alexa Fluor 660 Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012116 Alexa Fluor 680 Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012117 Alexa Fluor 700 Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012118 Alexa Fluor 750 Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012119 Alexa Fluor 790 Substances 0.000 description 1
- 241000724328 Alfalfa mosaic virus Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000019260 B-Cell Antigen Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010012919 B-Cell Antigen Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000894006 Bacteria Species 0.000 description 1
- DWRXFEITVBNRMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Beta-D-1-Arabinofuranosylthymine Natural products O=C1NC(=O)C(C)=CN1C1C(O)C(O)C(CO)O1 DWRXFEITVBNRMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000017420 CD3 protein, epsilon/gamma/delta subunit Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010076119 Caseins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108020004705 Codon Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010047041 Complementarity Determining Regions Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091035707 Consensus sequence Proteins 0.000 description 1
- RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper Chemical compound [Cu] RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-PSQAKQOGSA-N Cytidine Natural products O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1[C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](CO)O1 UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-PSQAKQOGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-SOOFDHNKSA-N D-ribofuranose Chemical compound OC[C@H]1OC(O)[C@H](O)[C@@H]1O HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-SOOFDHNKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BWGNESOTFCXPMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dihydrogen disulfide Chemical compound SS BWGNESOTFCXPMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010042407 Endonucleases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101710205719 Exodeoxyribonuclease 10 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100029075 Exonuclease 1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000003688 G-Protein-Coupled Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000045 G-Protein-Coupled Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- GYHNNYVSQQEPJS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Gallium Chemical compound [Ga] GYHNNYVSQQEPJS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010010803 Gelatin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010056740 Genital discharge Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108090000288 Glycoproteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000003886 Glycoproteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 239000006173 Good's buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007995 HEPES buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 101000604197 Homo sapiens Neuronatin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108090000144 Human Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000003839 Human Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010058683 Immobilized Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010054477 Immunoglobulin Fab Fragments Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000001706 Immunoglobulin Fab Fragments Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091029795 Intergenic region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004310 Ion Channels Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 241000713666 Lentivirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000003960 Ligases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000364 Ligases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000000232 Lipid Bilayer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007993 MOPS buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 241001465754 Metazoa Species 0.000 description 1
- 108700011259 MicroRNAs Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000012901 Milli-Q water Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108010086093 Mung Bean Nuclease Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000714177 Murine leukemia virus Species 0.000 description 1
- QPCDCPDFJACHGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N N,N-bis{2-[bis(carboxymethyl)amino]ethyl}glycine Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCN(CC(=O)O)CCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O QPCDCPDFJACHGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100038816 Neuronatin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101710163270 Nuclease Proteins 0.000 description 1
- AWZJFZMWSUBJAJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N OG-514 dye Chemical compound OC(=O)CSC1=C(F)C(F)=C(C(O)=O)C(C2=C3C=C(F)C(=O)C=C3OC3=CC(O)=C(F)C=C32)=C1F AWZJFZMWSUBJAJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000283283 Orcinus orca Species 0.000 description 1
- 108010067902 Peptide Library Proteins 0.000 description 1
- ABLZXFCXXLZCGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorous acid Chemical compound OP(O)=O ABLZXFCXXLZCGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004952 Polyamide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 206010036790 Productive cough Diseases 0.000 description 1
- PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-LMVFSUKVSA-N Ribose Natural products OC[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)C=O PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-LMVFSUKVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920005654 Sephadex Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000012507 Sephadex™ Substances 0.000 description 1
- 241000981880 Thermococcus kodakarensis KOD1 Species 0.000 description 1
- 108091023040 Transcription factor Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000040945 Transcription factor Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108020004566 Transfer RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- WGLPBDUCMAPZCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Trioxochromium Chemical compound O=[Cr](=O)=O WGLPBDUCMAPZCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000007983 Tris buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920004890 Triton X-100 Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000005411 Van der Waals force Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108010067390 Viral Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000002835 absorbance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002015 acyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229960002964 adalimumab Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000000996 additive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960000643 adenine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- UDMBCSSLTHHNCD-KQYNXXCUSA-N adenosine 5'-monophosphate Chemical compound C1=NC=2C(N)=NC=NC=2N1[C@@H]1O[C@H](COP(O)(O)=O)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O UDMBCSSLTHHNCD-KQYNXXCUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000007801 affinity label Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000032683 aging Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000000956 alloy Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910045601 alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-D-Furanose-Ribose Natural products OCC1OC(O)C(O)C1O HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000001408 amides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001412 amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001413 amino acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- BFNBIHQBYMNNAN-UHFFFAOYSA-N ammonium sulfate Chemical compound N.N.OS(O)(=O)=O BFNBIHQBYMNNAN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052921 ammonium sulfate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000011130 ammonium sulphate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000137 annealing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003466 anti-cipated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009830 antibody antigen interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012736 aqueous medium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052786 argon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229940120638 avastin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- ICCBZGUDUOMNOF-UHFFFAOYSA-N azidoamine Chemical compound NN=[N+]=[N-] ICCBZGUDUOMNOF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 210000003719 b-lymphocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- ZYGHJZDHTFUPRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzo-alpha-pyrone Natural products C1=CC=C2OC(=O)C=CC2=C1 ZYGHJZDHTFUPRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IQFYYKKMVGJFEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N beta-L-thymidine Natural products O=C1NC(=O)C(C)=CN1C1OC(CO)C(O)C1 IQFYYKKMVGJFEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960000397 bevacizumab Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000003115 biocidal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000033228 biological regulation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229920001222 biopolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000002981 blocking agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000004369 blood Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000008280 blood Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910021538 borax Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000008364 bulk solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000006227 byproduct Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000000234 capsid Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000005018 casein Substances 0.000 description 1
- BECPQYXYKAMYBN-UHFFFAOYSA-N casein, tech. Chemical compound NCCCCC(C(O)=O)N=C(O)C(CC(O)=O)N=C(O)C(CCC(O)=N)N=C(O)C(CC(C)C)N=C(O)C(CCC(O)=O)N=C(O)C(CC(O)=O)N=C(O)C(CCC(O)=O)N=C(O)C(C(C)O)N=C(O)C(CCC(O)=N)N=C(O)C(CCC(O)=N)N=C(O)C(CCC(O)=N)N=C(O)C(CCC(O)=O)N=C(O)C(CCC(O)=O)N=C(O)C(COP(O)(O)=O)N=C(O)C(CCC(O)=N)N=C(O)C(N)CC1=CC=CC=C1 BECPQYXYKAMYBN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000021240 caseins Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000005266 casting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000000170 cell membrane Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000005119 centrifugation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000001175 cerebrospinal fluid Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229960005395 cetuximab Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007385 chemical modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003638 chemical reducing agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005229 chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910000423 chromium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000012650 click reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002301 combined effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002299 complementary DNA Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000009918 complex formation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001268 conjugating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000005289 controlled pore glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000009146 cooperative binding Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000001671 coumarin Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 150000004775 coumarins Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000012864 cross contamination Methods 0.000 description 1
- UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-ZAKLUEHWSA-N cytidine Chemical compound O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](CO)O1 UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-ZAKLUEHWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940104302 cytosine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- SUYVUBYJARFZHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N dATP Natural products C1=NC=2C(N)=NC=NC=2N1C1CC(O)C(COP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(O)=O)O1 SUYVUBYJARFZHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GYOZYWVXFNDGLU-XLPZGREQSA-N dTMP Chemical compound O=C1NC(=O)C(C)=CN1[C@@H]1O[C@H](COP(O)(O)=O)[C@@H](O)C1 GYOZYWVXFNDGLU-XLPZGREQSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000003413 degradative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000032798 delamination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008021 deposition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011033 desalting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 1
- VGONTNSXDCQUGY-UHFFFAOYSA-N desoxyinosine Natural products C1C(O)C(CO)OC1N1C(NC=NC2=O)=C2N=C1 VGONTNSXDCQUGY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000018109 developmental process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003292 diminished effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010494 dissociation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005593 dissociations Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000002228 disulfide group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229960000284 efalizumab Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000002848 electrochemical method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005518 electrochemistry Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004070 electrodeposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003480 eluent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010828 elution Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000005447 environmental material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000407 epitaxy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940082789 erbitux Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000002148 esters Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001036 exonucleolytic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011049 filling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002866 fluorescence resonance energy transfer Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001506 fluorescence spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004907 flux Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000013305 food Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000000524 functional group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229910052733 gallium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000007789 gas Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000008273 gelatin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000159 gelatin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 235000019322 gelatine Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000011852 gelatine desserts Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000002523 gelfiltration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108010055863 gene b exonuclease Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000007274 generation of a signal involved in cell-cell signaling Effects 0.000 description 1
- RQFCJASXJCIDSX-UUOKFMHZSA-N guanosine 5'-monophosphate Chemical compound C1=2NC(N)=NC(=O)C=2N=CN1[C@@H]1O[C@H](COP(O)(O)=O)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O RQFCJASXJCIDSX-UUOKFMHZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CJNBYAVZURUTKZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N hafnium(IV) oxide Inorganic materials O=[Hf]=O CJNBYAVZURUTKZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940022353 herceptin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000012165 high-throughput sequencing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940048921 humira Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000001976 improved effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960000598 infliximab Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000004615 ingredient Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010849 ion bombardment Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052742 iron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000021056 liquid food Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000001459 lithography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940076783 lucentis Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000002751 lymph Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229910001629 magnesium chloride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052943 magnesium sulfate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000019341 magnesium sulphate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000696 magnetic material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000008018 melting Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002844 melting Methods 0.000 description 1
- QSHDDOUJBYECFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N mercury Chemical compound [Hg] QSHDDOUJBYECFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052753 mercury Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000002082 metal nanoparticle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002923 metal particle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000009629 microbiological culture Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011859 microparticle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000013336 milk Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 210000004080 milk Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000008267 milk Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010369 molecular cloning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003068 molecular probe Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052750 molybdenum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- PPHZUAWXHMGPCR-UHFFFAOYSA-O mr 121 cation Chemical compound C1=C2CCC[N+](CCCC(O)=O)=C2C=C2C1=NC(C=C1CCCN(C1=C1)CC)=C1O2 PPHZUAWXHMGPCR-UHFFFAOYSA-O 0.000 description 1
- 229930014626 natural product Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 229910052754 neon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- GKAOGPIIYCISHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N neon atom Chemical compound [Ne] GKAOGPIIYCISHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000007935 neutral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000004767 nitrides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000001668 nucleic acid synthesis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001293 nucleolytic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002777 nucleoside Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000003835 nucleoside group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000003921 oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxo(oxoalumanyloxy)alumane Chemical compound O=[Al]O[Al]=O TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960001972 panitumumab Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002161 passivation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000059 patterning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108700010839 phage proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- UEZVMMHDMIWARA-UHFFFAOYSA-M phosphonate Chemical compound [O-]P(=O)=O UEZVMMHDMIWARA-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 125000005642 phosphothioate group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000000206 photolithography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000704 physical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005240 physical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000013600 plasmid vector Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000004910 pleural fluid Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229920002647 polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000768 polyamine Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000003752 polymerase chain reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037048 polymerization activity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006116 polymerization reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920001296 polysiloxane Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000036 polyvinylpyrrolidone Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000001267 polyvinylpyrrolidone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000013855 polyvinylpyrrolidone Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000002243 precursor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000644 propagated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002818 protein evolution Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000746 purification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003220 pyrenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000003254 radicals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000009257 reactivity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010188 recombinant method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940116176 remicade Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000003362 replicative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001177 retroviral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010839 reverse transcription Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108020004418 ribosomal RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000005096 rolling process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000003296 saliva Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000000582 semen Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000002966 serum Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 108091006024 signal transducing proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000034285 signal transducing proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000012239 silicon dioxide Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229910052814 silicon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000004088 simulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108010062513 snake venom phosphodiesterase I Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 235000010339 sodium tetraborate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- RPENMORRBUTCPR-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium;1-hydroxy-2,5-dioxopyrrolidine-3-sulfonate Chemical compound [Na+].ON1C(=O)CC(S([O-])(=O)=O)C1=O RPENMORRBUTCPR-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000002689 soil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000021055 solid food Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000011343 solid material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 241000894007 species Species 0.000 description 1
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004544 sputter deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000003802 sputum Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 208000024794 sputum Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 238000010186 staining Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007858 starting material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007619 statistical method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000035882 stress Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000008163 sugars Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000006228 supernatant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000004243 sweat Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052715 tantalum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 210000001138 tear Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000010409 thin film Substances 0.000 description 1
- RYYWUUFWQRZTIU-UHFFFAOYSA-K thiophosphate Chemical compound [O-]P([O-])([O-])=S RYYWUUFWQRZTIU-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 238000013169 thromboelastometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940104230 thymidine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940113082 thymine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229910052718 tin Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 210000001519 tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000004408 titanium dioxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000005945 translocation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004627 transmission electron microscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960000575 trastuzumab Drugs 0.000 description 1
- UNXRWKVEANCORM-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphosphoric acid Chemical compound OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(O)=O UNXRWKVEANCORM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LENZDBCJOHFCAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tris Chemical compound OCC(N)(CO)CO LENZDBCJOHFCAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BSVBQGMMJUBVOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N trisodium borate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[O-]B([O-])[O-] BSVBQGMMJUBVOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229940035893 uracil Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000002700 urine Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229910052720 vanadium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000013311 vegetables Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000002699 waste material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003732 xanthenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052724 xenon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- FHNFHKCVQCLJFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N xenon atom Chemical compound [Xe] FHNFHKCVQCLJFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N21/00—Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means, i.e. using sub-millimetre waves, infrared, visible or ultraviolet light
- G01N21/62—Systems in which the material investigated is excited whereby it emits light or causes a change in wavelength of the incident light
- G01N21/63—Systems in which the material investigated is excited whereby it emits light or causes a change in wavelength of the incident light optically excited
- G01N21/64—Fluorescence; Phosphorescence
- G01N21/6428—Measuring fluorescence of fluorescent products of reactions or of fluorochrome labelled reactive substances, e.g. measuring quenching effects, using measuring "optrodes"
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
- G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
- G01N33/483—Physical analysis of biological material
- G01N33/487—Physical analysis of biological material of liquid biological material
- G01N33/48707—Physical analysis of biological material of liquid biological material by electrical means
- G01N33/48721—Investigating individual macromolecules, e.g. by translocation through nanopores
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B82—NANOTECHNOLOGY
- B82Y—SPECIFIC USES OR APPLICATIONS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MEASUREMENT OR ANALYSIS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MANUFACTURE OR TREATMENT OF NANOSTRUCTURES
- B82Y15/00—Nanotechnology for interacting, sensing or actuating, e.g. quantum dots as markers in protein assays or molecular motors
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B82—NANOTECHNOLOGY
- B82Y—SPECIFIC USES OR APPLICATIONS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MEASUREMENT OR ANALYSIS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MANUFACTURE OR TREATMENT OF NANOSTRUCTURES
- B82Y5/00—Nanobiotechnology or nanomedicine, e.g. protein engineering or drug delivery
Definitions
- ELISAs enzyme-linked immunosorbent assays
- ELISAs enzyme-linked immunosorbent assays
- Multiplex analogs of ELISA that employ DNA barcodes have been developed that produce, either directly or indirectly, multiple signals to indicate the presence or quantity of multiple target molecules.
- An exemplary direct DNA barcode signal is described by Akeson et al, U.S. patent 7060507, where polymers of various lengths and nanopore translocation speeds are used to generate electronic signatures to identify different binding compounds.
- Exemplary indirect DNA barcode signals are described by Buggenum et al, Scientific Reports, 6: 22675 (2016); Nam et al, Science, 301: 1884-1886 (2003); Buggenum et al, Nature Comm., 9: 2384 (2016), and like references, where different forms of multiplex immuno- PCR are implemented with various readouts, including large-scale DNA sequencing, to identify and/or count barcodes associated with binding events.
- High throughput sequencing has also been used as a readout in the field of therapeutic antibody development where, instead of barcodes, coding sequences are analyzed to identify proteins that display favorable binding properties, such as, higher affinity to a target molecule than a reference binding compound or lower or higher crossreactivity with non-target molecules of interest, e.g. DuBridge, U.S. patent publications 2012/0258866 and 2012/0077691; and U.S. patent 10526597.
- Current direct and indirect methods of identifying and counting DNA barcodes or coding sequences in multiplex measurements suffer from either requiring an accurate and conveniently implemented single molecule sequencing method or one or more amplification steps. Until recently the former has not been available and the latter adds a step that adds a source of readout variability and requires statistical analysis of large numbers of sequence reads, and the possible use of internal standards, for reliable measurements.
- the invention is directed to methods for detecting the presence or quantity of one or more binding pairs formed between target analytes and binding conjugates in a sample by tabulating oligonucleotide sequences of binding conjugates, wherein such oligonucleotide sequences are determined using an optically based nanopore sequencing method.
- a plurality of binding conjugates each comprising a binding compound specific for an analyte and an oligonucleotide barcode.
- the method comprises the steps of: (a) combining in a reaction mixture a sample and at least one binding conjugate under conditions that permit at least one binding conjugate to specifically bind to a target analyte, wherein each binding conjugate comprises: (A) a binding compound specific for a target analyte, and (B) an oligonucleotide barcode linked to the binding compound, wherein the oligonucleotide barcode has a nucleotide sequence which identifies the target analyte and whose nucleotides are labeled, or capable of being labeled, by distinguishable fluorescent dyes; (b) separating unbound binding conjugates from binding conjugates specifically bound to target analytes; (c) releasing the oligonucleotide barcodes from the bound binding conjugates; and (d) identifying the presence or quantity of the one or more target analytes by sequencing the oligonucleotide barcodes with the following steps:
- each nanopore comprises a passage through an insulative layer and an opaque layer, the passage through the opaque layer having a diameter
- the oligonucleotide barcode of a binding conjugate is attached to a carrier particle, which facilitates nanopore-based sequence identification.
- the invention includes a method for identifying binding conjugates that bind to predetermined target analytes with an affinity equal to or greater than a predetermined value.
- predetermined affinity value is determined by a reference compound, such as a pre-existing antibody binding compound.
- the invention includes a method for identifying binding conjugates that bind to predetermined target analytes with an affinity equal to or greater than a predetermined reference compound and that have reduced cross-reactivity (i.e. affinity) to another predetermined compound.
- the invention includes a method for identifying binding conjugates that bind to predetermined target analytes with an affinity equal to or greater than a predetermined reference compound and that have increased cross-reactivity (i.e. affinity) to another predetermined compound.
- the invention is directed to methods of detecting the presence or quantity of one or more target molecules in a sample comprising the steps of: (a) combining in a reaction mixture a sample and at least one binding conjugate under conditions that permit at least one binding conjugate to specifically bind to a target molecule, wherein each binding conjugate comprises: (A) a binding compound specific for a target molecule, and (B) an oligonucleotide barcode linked to the binding compound, wherein the oligonucleotide barcode has a nucleotide sequence which identifies the target molecule and whose nucleotides are labeled, or capable of being labeled, by distinguishable fluorescent dyes; (b) separating unbound binding conjugates from binding conjugates specifically bound to target molecules; (c) releasing the oligonucleotide barcodes from the bound binding conjugates; and (d) identifying the presence or quantity of the one or more target molecules by sequencing the oligonucleotide barcodes
- the oligonucleotide barcode of a binding conjugate is attached to a carrier particle.
- the one or more target molecules are a plurality of target molecules.
- the plurality of target molecules is in the range of from 2 to 500 target molecules.
- the plurality of target molecules is in the range of from 2 to 50 target molecules and the binding compounds are antibody binding compounds
- the present invention also provides kits for use in methods of the invention.
- Figures 1A-1B illustrates the steps of exemplary embodiment of the method of the invention.
- Figure 1C illustrates one embodiment of a binding conjugate.
- Figure ID illustrates another embodiment of a binding conjugate.
- Figure IE illustrates still another embodiment of a binding conjugate.
- Figure 2A-2D illustrates an exemplary sequencing step for use in the method of the invention.
- Figure 3 illustrates an exemplary apparatus for carrying out the sequencing (or barcode identification) step of the invention.
- Figure 4 illustrates an embodiment for identifying high affinity binding compounds for a target molecule.
- the invention is directed to methods for detecting binding of predetermined binding conjugates to one or more target molecules of interest.
- methods of the invention comprise the steps: (a) combining in a reaction mixture a sample containing one or more target molecules and at least one predetermined binding conjugate under conditions that permit at least one predetermined binding conjugate to specifically bind to a target molecule, wherein each binding conjugate comprises: (A) a binding compound and (B) a polynucleotide linked to the binding compound, wherein the polynucleotide has a nucleotide sequence which identifies the binding compound and whose nucleotides are labeled, or capable of being labeled, by distinguishable fluorescent dyes; (b) separating unbound binding conjugates from binding conjugates specifically bound to target molecules; (c) releasing the polynucleotides from the bound binding conjugates; and (d) identifying the presence or quantity of the binding compounds by sequencing the released polynucleotides with the following steps:
- each nanopore comprises a passage through an insulative layer and an opaque layer, the passage through the opaque layer having a diameter
- FIG. 1A-1B An exemplary embodiment of a multiplexed binding assay of the invention is illustrated in Figs. 1A-1B.
- Sample (100) containing target molecules of interest e.g. proteins, 1, 2, 3 ... N, are combined (102) and incubated with one or more capture reagents (106), such as, antibodies, bound to surface (104) under conditions (108) that promote the formation of binding pairs; that is, stable complexes between capture reagents and the target molecules for which they are specific, after which non-binding compounds of sample (100) are removed, e.g.
- Surface (104) may be a surface of a planar support or a bead or microparticle.
- the distribution of capture reagents on surface (104) may be homogeneous in that the one or more capture reagents are present as a mixture in a uniform density or the distribution may be in non-overlapping patches containing single kind of capture reagent. Usually there is at least one capture reagent for each target molecule of interest.
- To surface (104) containing captured target molecules is added (110) binding conjugates (112) under conditions that promote the formation of stable complexes between binding compounds of the binding conjugates and their respective target molecules.
- Binding conjugates (112) may have a variety of different formats, including (for example) the formats illustrated in Figs. 1C-1E and 4.
- binding conjugates (112) comprise a binding compound (132) (such as an antibody binding compound) releasably linked to carrier particle (130) (for example, through a photocleavable linkage (136)) and polynucleotide (134) linked to the same carrier particle (130).
- a binding compound such as an antibody binding compound
- carrier particle 130
- polynucleotide 134
- the polynucleotides are shown as being labeled with a sequence of fluorescent dyes, f and g (e.g. attached to bases, as described below) to identify different binding compounds (and consequently the target molecules they are specific for).
- f and g e.g. attached to bases, as described below
- polynucleotide (134) is illustrated as being labeled with a sequence of symbols (star, filled circle, open circle), for identifying its binding compound.
- carrier particles with their polynucleotides are released (116) and their labels analyzed and counted (118) using the single molecule sequencing method described below, which is illustrate in part in Fig. 1C.
- Fig. 1C after binding conjugate (131) binds (138) to target molecule (140), linkages (136) to binding compounds (132) are cleaved (142), thereby releasing carrier particle (130) with labeled polynucleotide (134) attached.
- the released carrier particle with labeled polynucleotide (144) is directly sequenced (143) by the method described below.
- Linkages, including cleavable linkages, between polynucleotides and binding compounds are well-known in the art and are disclosed is the following exemplary references: Agasti et al, J. Am. Chem.
- Kits for making antibody-DNA conjugates are also commercially available, e.g. Solulink Conjugation System (Technical Manual, Cat. No. A-9202-001, version 12.12.2012), also described in U.S. patents 6,686,461;
- Photocleavable linkages are described in Urdea et al, U.S. patent 5367066; Agasti et al (cited above); and Saran et al (cited above), the latter U.S. patent being incorporated herein by reference.
- the photocleavable linker disclosed by Agasti et al (cited above) is employed with the invention.
- binding conjugates with alternative formats are illustrated in Figs. ID and IE.
- binding compound (150) of binding conjugate (149) is attached through linker (152) to strand (153a) of double stranded DNA (154).
- Double stranded DNA (154) may include a barcode sequence (155), which may or may not be labeled.
- Other strand (153b) of double stranded DNA (154) is attached to carrier particle (156). After binding compound (150) binds to its target molecule and the resulting complex is washed, strands (153a and 153b) may be melted to release carrier particle (156).
- Strand (153b) may be pre-labeled and directly evaluated by the sequencing method described below, or strand (153b) may be labeled after melting, then evaluated. Alternatively, a separately labeled polynucleotide may be attached to carrier particle (156).
- binding conjugate (160) comprises binding compound (162) linked to polynucleotide (165) which has primer binding site (164) and barcode (166). After binding conjugate (160) binds to target molecule (167) and after washing, complementary oligonucleotide (168) on carrier particle (170) anneals to primer binding site (164) and is extended by a polymerase in the presence of labeled dNTPs.
- Carrier particle (170) with extended strand (172) is then dehybridized and analyzed by the sequencing method described below.
- the invention is a method for identifying binding compounds that specifically binding to predetermined target molecules.
- such specific binding may comprise binding to a predetermined target molecule with affinity greater than that of a reference compound, such as, a pre-existing therapeutic antibody.
- binding conjugates of the invention may be a protein display system, such as a phage display system as illustrated in Fig. 4.
- a phage display library (400) is created using conventional techniques, for example, to display binding compounds that comprise single chain antibody binding compounds, e.g. as taught by DuBridge U.S.
- Each phage of the library comprises a capsid (404) containing DNA or RNA that is capable of encoding synthesis of display proteins (402); thus, the phages serve as binding conjugates of the invention.
- phage display library (400) is combined in a reaction mixture (406) with target proteins (408) which may be (for example) a therapeutic target protein adsorbed on surface (410). After incubation under predetermined conditions (412), non-binding phage are washed away, after which binding phage are eluted, DNA is extracted and sequenced (414) as described below.
- the method of the invention includes a step of sequencing oligonucleotides, such as, oligonucleotide barcodes, using an optically based nanopore sequencing technique that is described in this section.
- oligonucleotides such as, oligonucleotide barcodes
- optically based nanopore sequencing technique that is described in this section.
- Particular reaction well structures, particular labels, and fabrication examples are shown for purposes of illustration. It should be appreciated, however, that the disclosure is not intended to be limiting in this respect, as other structures, arrays of reaction wells, and other fabrication technologies that are not specifically detailed herein may be utilized to implement various aspects of the present sequencing method.
- the step for identifying a nucleotide sequence of a barcode comprises providing a solid state substrate comprising a cis side and a trans side, the substrate comprising a reaction well that defines a reaction volume and comprises (i) a proximal throughhole extending between the cis side and the trans side of the substrate, (ii) one or more side walls, and (iii) a distal opening.
- the solid state substrate further comprises an opaque metal layer that substantially blocks excitation light from penetrating into the reaction volume and from penetrating to the cis side of the substrate.
- a carrier particle comprising a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand that is attached to the carrier particle.
- the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises (i) a proximal end that is attached to the carrier particle, (ii) a distal end that is cleavable by an exonuclease, and (iii) at least one fluorescently labeled nucleotide comprising a fluorescent label.
- the carrier particle is located on the cis side of the substrate, but does not pass through the throughhole, such that the attached fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand protrudes through the throughhole so that the distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand is in the reaction volume.
- the trans side of the substrate is illuminated with excitation light to create a fluorescence excitation zone adjacent to the distal opening of the reaction well.
- the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is reacted with an exonuclease so that mononucleotides are released serially from the distal end of the strand and diffuse through the fluorescence excitation zone, so that fluorescently labeled mononucleotides in the excitation zone emit fluorescent signals.
- the fluorescent signals are detected as a function of time, whereby a nucleotide sequence is determined from the time order of fluorescent signals detected from the released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides.
- the distal opening of the reaction well has a minimum diameter of at least 30 nm. In some embodiments, the distal opening of the reaction well has a minimum diameter of 50 nm to 150 nm. In some embodiments, the one or more walls of the reaction well are not tapered. In some embodiments, the one or more walls of the reaction well are substantially cylindrical. In some embodiments, the opaque metal layer comprises gold or aluminum. In some embodiments, the opaque metal layer has a thickness of 100 nm to 600 nm. In some embodiments, the solid state substrate comprises a plurality of opaque metal layers. In some embodiments, the reaction well has a well depth of at least 200 nm.
- the reaction well has a well depth of 200 nm to 1000 nm.
- the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand in the reaction volume comprises a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide segment containing at least 100 contiguous nucleotides.
- the throughhole has a minimum diameter of at least 2 nm. In some embodiments, the throughhole has a minimum diameter of 2 nm to 50 nm.
- the substrate comprises a thin membrane layer that contains the proximal throughhole and that has a thickness of between 20 nm and 50 nm. In some embodiments, the thin membrane layer comprises silicon nitride.
- the excitation light has a wavelength of 380 nm or greater.
- the solid substrate comprises surface portion(s) that define the reaction volume, and the surface portion(s) comprise at least one surface passivation coating.
- one or more side walls of the reaction well comprise one or both of a silicon oxide coating and aluminum oxide coating.
- the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises at least two different kinds of nucleotides, each kind labeled with a distinguishing fluorescent label.
- the carrier particle is not magnetic. In some embodiments, the carrier particle is magnetic. In some embodiments, during said reacting, the carrier particle is maintained next to the proximal throughhole by a voltage bias. In some embodiments, the carrier particle comprises a plurality of fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands having polynucleotide sequences that are different from each other.
- the voltage bias is stopped to allow the carrier particle to move away from the proximal throughhole, so that the remaining fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is removed from the reaction volume, and then a voltage bias is applied to move the same or a different carrier particle toward the proximal throughhole so that a new fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is delivered into the reaction well for reacting with an exonuclease.
- the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand in the reaction volume comprises a double-stranded nucleic acid. In some embodiments, the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand in the reaction volume comprises a singlestranded nucleic acid. In some embodiments, the carrier particle comprises a plurality of fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands, which in some embodiments, are singlestranded or double-stranded nucleic acids.
- the solid state substrate comprises a plurality of reaction wells.
- the plurality of reaction wells are configured as a onedimensional or two-dimensional array.
- the sequencing method is directed to fluorescence-based analysis of oligonucleotide or polynucleotide barcodes using sequential digestion of fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands by exonuclease activity.
- Fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands (also referred to as “fluorescently labeled strands” of “fluorescently labeled barcodes”) for sequencing may be prepared by any suitable method.
- Each fluorescently labeled strand may have a proximal end and a distal end. The proximal end is coupled, directly or indirectly, to a carrier particle as described further below. The distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand protrudes away from the carrier particle when the fluorescently labeled strand is coupled to a carrier particle.
- Each fluorescently labeled strand is capable of being cleaved by an exonuclease, so that mononucleotides, some or all of which comprise fluorescent labels, are released serially (one-by-one) from the distal end of the strand for subsequent detection (discussed further below).
- fluorescently labeled strands may be provided in singlestranded form, for serial cleavage of a distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand by a single-strand-specific exonuclease.
- fluorescently labeled strands may be provided in double- stranded form comprising a fluorescently labeled strand, for serial cleavage of a distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand by a double-strand- specific exonuclease.
- a 5 ’-exonuclease is used.
- the 5 ’-exonuclease may be single-strand-specific or double-strand-specific.
- the fluorescently labeled strand may be provided in single-stranded form such that the 3 ’-end is the proximal end coupled to the carrier particle, and the 5 ’-end is the distal end to be cleaved by the 5 ’-exonuclease.
- a 3 ’-exonuclease is used.
- the 3 ’-exonuclease may be single-strand-specific or double-strand-specific.
- the fluorescently labeled strand may be provided in single-stranded form such that the 5 ’-end is the proximal end coupled to the carrier particle, and the 3 ’-end is the distal end to be cleaved by the 3 ’-exonuclease.
- a fluorescently labeled strand may also be provided in a form comprising a double- stranded region and a single- stranded region.
- a fluorescently labeled strand is provided in a double- stranded form and is hybridized to a complementary strand such that the fluorescently labeled strand comprises a single- stranded 3 ’-overhang extending from a double-stranded region, the 3 ’-overhang can be cleaved by a singlestrand specific 3 ’-exonuclease until the exonuclease reaches the double-stranded region.
- the 3 ’-end of the 3 ’-overhang is the distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand
- the 5 ’-end of the 3 ’-overhang is the proximal end of the fluorescently labeled strand.
- a fluorescently labeled strand is provided in a doublestranded form and is hybridized to a complementary strand that comprises a singlestranded 3 ’-overhang extending from a double-stranded region
- a double- strand- specific 5 ’-exonuclease can cleave the recessed 5 ’-end of the fluorescently labeled strand in the double- stranded region.
- the 5 ’-end of the fluorescently labeled strand is the distal end
- the 3 ’-end of the fluorescently labeled strand is the proximal end.
- a fluorescently labeled strand provided in a double- stranded form and is hybridized to a complementary strand such that the fluorescently labeled strand comprises a single- stranded 5 ’-overhang extending from a double- stranded region
- the 5 ’-overhang can be cleaved by a single-strand specific 5 ’ -exonuclease until the exonuclease reaches the double- stranded region.
- the 5 ’-end of the 5 ’-overhang is the distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand
- the 3 ’-end of the 5 ’-overhang is the proximal end of the fluorescently labeled strand.
- a fluorescently labeled strand is provided in a double-stranded form and is hybridized to a complementary strand that comprises a single- stranded 5 ’-overhang extending from a double- stranded region
- a double-strand-specific 3 ’ -exonuclease can cleave the recessed 3 ’-end of the fluorescently labeled strand in the double-stranded region.
- the 3 ’-end of the fluorescently labeled strand is the distal end
- the 5 ’-end of the fluorescently labeled strand is the proximal end.
- the fluorescently labeled strands may be prepared by DNA polymerase-mediated extension (to make a fluorescently labeled DNA strand or barcode) or by RNA polymerase-mediated extension (to make a fluorescently labeled RNA strand or barcode) of a primer that is complementary to a sample polynucleotide sequence.
- a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises one kind of nucleotide that is labeled with a fluorescent label. In some embodiments, a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises two different kinds of nucleotides, each kind labeled with a distinguishing fluorescent label. In some embodiments, a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises at least two different kinds of nucleotides, each kind labeled with a distinguishing fluorescent label. In some embodiments, a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises three different kinds of nucleotides, each kind labeled with a distinguishing fluorescent label.
- a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises at least three different kinds of nucleotides, each kind labeled with a distinguishing fluorescent label. In some embodiments, a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises four different kinds of nucleotides, each kind labeled with a distinguishing fluorescent label.
- a nucleotide sequence of a target polynucleotide strand is determined by performing four separate reactions in which copies of the target polynucleotide strand have each of its four different kinds of nucleotide (A, C, G and T) labeled with one fluorescent label while at the same time the other nucleotides on the same target polynucleotide strand are labeled with a second fluorescent label. For example, if a first fluorescent label is attached to A's of the target polynucleotide strand in a first reaction, then a second fluorescent label is attached to C's, G's and T's (i.e.
- the first label is attached to C's of the target polynucleotide strand and the second fluorescent label is attached to A's, G's and T's (i.e. to the "not-C" nucleotides) of the target polynucleotide strand. And so on, for nucleotides G and T.
- the same labeling scheme may be expressed in terms of conventional terminology for subsets of nucleotide types; thus, in the above example, in a first fluorescent label is attached to A's and a second fluorescent label is attached to B's; in a second reaction, a first fluorescent label is attached to C's and a second fluorescent label is attached to D's; in a third reaction, a first fluorescent label is attached to G's and a second fluorescent label is attached to H's; and in a fourth reaction, a first fluorescent label is attached to T's and a second fluorescent label is attached to Vs.
- a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises a single fluorescent label attached to a single kind of monomer, for example, every T (or substantially every T) of a polynucleotide strand is labeled with a fluorescent label, e.g. a cyanine dye.
- a collection, or sequence, of fluorescent signals from the polynucleotide strand may form a signature or fingerprint for the particular polynucleotide. In some such embodiments, such fingerprints may or may not provide enough information for a sequence of monomers to be determined.
- fluorescent labels are mutually quenching. In some embodiments, fluorescent labels are not mutually quenching.
- Mutually quenching fluorescent labels have the following properties: (i) each member quenches fluorescence of every member (for example, by FRET or by static or contact mechanisms), and (ii) each member generates a distinct fluorescent signal when excited and when in a non-quenched state. That is, if a mutually quenching set consists of two dyes, DI and D2, then (i) DI is self-quenched (e.g. by contact quenching with another DI molecule) and it is quenched by D2 (e.g. by contact quenching) and (ii) D2 is selfquenched (e.g. by contact quenching with another D2 molecule) and it is quenched by DI (e.g. by contact quenching).
- Fluorescent labels include any fluorescent dyes chosen by the user for identifying attached mononucleotides in the methods of the invention.
- Exemplary fluorescent labels for labeling NTPs, dNTPs, NTP analogs and dNTP analogs include, but are not limited to, xanthenes, fluoresceins, rhodamines, sulforhodamines, rhodals, cyanines, coumarins, and pyrenes. If different fluorescent labels are used to identify and distinguish different kinds of nucleotides, then the fluorescent labels can be from the same structural class of fluorescent labels (e.g., all are fluoresceins) or from different classes of fluorescent labels.
- members of a mutually quenching set comprise organic fluorescent dyes that comprise components or moieties capable of stacking interactions, such as aromatic ring structures.
- exemplary mutually quenching sets of fluorescent labels may be selected from rhodamine dyes, fluorescein dyes and cyanine dyes.
- a mutually quenching set may comprise a rhodamine dye, TAMRA, and a fluorescein dye, FAM.
- mutually quenching sets of fluorescent dyes may comprise two or more dyes selected from Oregon Green 488, Fluorescein-EX, fluorescein isothiocyanate, Rhodamine Red-X, Lissamine rhodamine B, Calcein, fluorescein, rhodamine, one or more BODIPY dyes, Texas Red, Oregon Green 514, and one or more Alexa Fluors.
- Exemplary BODIPY dyes include BODIPY FL, BODIPY R6G, BODIPY TMR, BODIPY 581/591, BODIPY TR, BODIPY 630/650 and BODIPY 650/665.
- Exemplary Alexa fluorescent labels include Alexa Fluor 350, Alexa Fluor 405, Alexa Fluor 430, Alexa Fluor 488, Alexa Fluor 500, Alexa Fluor 514, Alexa Fluor 532, Alexa Fluor 546, Alexa Fluor 555, Alexa Fluor 568, Alexa Fluor 594, Alexa Fluor 610, Alexa Fluor 633, Alexa Fluor 635, Alexa Fluor 647, Alexa Fluor 660, Alexa Fluor 680, Alexa Fluor 700, Alexa Fluor 750 and Alexa Fluor 790.
- exemplary fluorescent labels for labeling NTPs, dNTPs, NTP analogs and dNTP analogs include, but are not limited to, Alexa 488, AMCA, Atto 655, Cy3, Cy5, Evoblue 30, fluorescein, Gnothis blue 1, Gnothis blue 2, Gnothis blue 3, Dy630, Dy635, MR121, rhodamine, Rhodamine Green, Oregon Green, TAMRA, and the like.
- Exemplary fluorescent labels for dUTP analogs include, but are not limited to, Alexa 488, AMCA, Atto 655, Cy3, Cy5, Dy630, Dy665, Evoblue 30, Evoblue 90, fluorescein, Gnothis blue 1, Gnothis blue 2, Gnothis blue 3, MR 121, Oregon Green, rhodamine, Rhodamine Green, TAMRA, and the like.
- Exemplary fluorescent labels for dCTP analogs include, but are not limited to, Atto 655, Cy5, Evoblue 30, Gnothis blue 3, rhodamine, Rhodamine Green, TAMRA, and the like.
- Exemplary fluorescent labels for dATP analogs include, but are not limited to, Atto 655, Cy5, Evoblue 30, Gnothis blue 3, Rhodamine Green, and the like.
- Exemplary fluorescent labels for dGTP analogs include, but are not limited to, Evoblue 30, Gnothis blue 3, Rhodamine Green, and the like.
- Exemplary pairs of fluorescent labels for dUTP analogs and dCTP analogs include, but are not limited to, TAMRA, Rhodamine Green, Atto 655, Evoblue 30, Evoblue 30, Atto 655, Evoblue 30, Gnothis blue 3, Evoblue 30, Rhodamine Green, Gnothis blue 1, Rhodamine Green, Gnothis blue 2, Atto 655), Gnothis blue 3, Cy5, and the like.
- exemplary fluorescent labels for labeling NTPs, dNTPs, NTP analogs and dNTP analogs include, but are not limited to, Oregon Green 488, fluorescein-EX, FITC, Rhodamine Red-X, Lissamine rhodamine B, calcein, fluorescein, rhodamine, BODIPYs, and Texas Red, e.g. which are disclosed in Molecular Probes Handbook — A Guide to Fluorescent Probes and Eabeling Technologies, 11th Edition (2010) as revised online as of the date of the present disclosure.
- nucleotide to label examples of nucleotide molecules
- linkers for attachment examples of nucleic acid polymerases
- nucleic acid polymerases for synthesizing fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands in the presence of NTPs, dNTPs, NTP analogs, and/or dNTP analogs
- Goodman et al U.S. patent 5,945,312
- Jett et al U.S. patent 5,405,747
- Muehlegger et al U.S.
- Exemplary nucleic acid polymerases for synthesizing fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands in the presence of NTPs, dNTPs, NTP analogs and/or dNTP analogs include, but are not limited to, Vent (exo minus) polymerase, Taq polymerase, E.
- exemplary nucleic acid polymerases include, but are not limited to, Vent (exo minus) polymerase and Klenow fragment (exo minus).
- exo minus polymerases have greater processivity relative to corresponding polymerases that retain 3 ’-exonuclease activity, so that synthesis of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands can be accomplished more efficiently.
- selected kinds of nucleotides of a strand are labeled by incorporating analog dNTPs of the selected kinds of nucleotides in an extension reaction, wherein the analog dNTPs are derivatized with orthogonally reactive functionalities that allow attachment of different labels to different kinds of nucleotides in a subsequent reaction, as described, for example, in Jett et al, U.S. patent 5,405,747, which is incorporated herein by reference.
- the carrier particles have dimensions that are sufficiently large to prevent the carrier particles from moving through the throughholes of the reaction wells into the reaction wells.
- Each carrier particle is capable of being moved by an electromagnetic force to be near a throughhole of a reaction well to deliver the distal end of a first fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand, which is attached to the carrier particle, through the throughhole into a reaction well.
- the carrier particles are magnetic carrier particles.
- the carrier particles are not magnetic carrier particles.
- the electromagnetic force is a voltage bias. In some embodiments, the electromagnetic force is a magnetic force.
- carrier particles have a diameter, or a largest diameter, that is at least 15 nm, or at least 20 nm, or at least 25 nm, or at least 30 nm, or from 15 nm to 100 nm, or from 15 nm to 75 nm, or from 15 nm to 50 nm, or from 20 nm to 50 nm.
- carrier particles having larger or smaller diameters may also be used.
- nanoparticle refers to a carrier particle having a diameter, or largest diameter, that is less than 200 nm, or less than 150 nm, or less than 100 nm.
- the carrier particles may be charged or uncharged.
- the carrier particles may have a net neutral charge, a net positive charge, or a net negative charge, based on the net balance of positively charged groups and negatively charged groups on the particles under the pH conditions of the surrounding aqueous medium, which usually comprises an aqueous buffer.
- the carrier particles Preferably, for control of movement by an electric field (voltage bias), the carrier particles have a net negative charge when they comprise one or more attached fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands.
- each carrier particle is capable of being moved by an electromagnetic force away from a throughhole of a reaction well, to remove a cleaved fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand from the throughhole.
- the carrier particle is moved away from the well so that the cleaved strand is withdrawn from the well, and then the same or a different carrier particle is moved near the throughhole of the well to deliver the distal end of a second (sometimes called “new”) fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand through the throughhole into the reaction well.
- the carrier particles are not covalently coupled to the throughholes.
- the carrier particles comprise spherical particles.
- the carrier particles comprise non-spherical particles, having, for example, elliptoid or irregular shapes.
- the carrier particles comprise both spherical particles and non-spherical particles.
- the carrier particles are provided as a uniform population of substantially identical carrier particles within a size range (e.g., within plus or minus a standard deviation or coefficient of variation), but the carrier particles are not necessarily identical, provided that they effectively carry and deliver fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands to the reaction wells.
- Carrier particles may be made from any materials that are suitable for the purposes of the present invention.
- the carrier particles are metal particles, such as metal nanoparticles.
- the carrier particles are gold nanoparticles.
- the carrier particles are silver nanoparticles.
- one or more carrier particles comprise one or more magnetic materials, such as iron or iron oxide, that allow the particles to be moved by a magnetic field.
- the carrier particles are iron oxide particles.
- the carrier particles are silica particles or controlled pore glass particles.
- the carrier particles comprise an immobilized protein, such as streptavidin or an antigen-specific antibody, for binding a biotin moiety or antigen moiety that is attached to or associated with a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to be sequenced.
- the carrier particles are proteins, such as streptavidins or antibodies, for binding one or more biotinylated oligonucleotides or antigen-oligonucleotide conj ugates .
- Fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands may be attached to carrier particles by any suitable means. Usually, fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands are attached to carrier particles by means of a capture moiety.
- Capture moieties usually comprise members of a pair of moieties that have a mutual affinity for each other (also referred to as a “binding pair”).
- capture moieties are polypeptides such as antibodies or antigens.
- capture moieties are oligonucleotides that are complementary to sequences in, or associated with, the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to be sequenced.
- Capture moieties may be monovalent (for capturing one binding partner) or multivalent (for capturing multiple binding partners).
- Avidin is an example of a monovalent capture moiety
- streptavidin, with four biotin binding sites is an example of a multivalent capture moiety.
- the capture moiety comprises an antibody (for specifically binding one or two antigens). More generally, the capture member may be any member of a binding pair for which the other member of the pair is associated with a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to facilitate attachment of the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to the carrier particle.
- a carrier particle is not itself a capture moiety (e.g., if the carrier particle is not streptavidin, an antibody, or another monovalent or multivalent entity)
- the carrier particle comprises at least one, and preferably a plurality, of capture moieties by which fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands may be attached directly or indirectly to the carrier particles.
- Capture moieties are usually attached to carrier particles by linkers. Any suitable linker may be used. Since exonuclease cleavage and other elements of the present invention are usually performed in aqueous solution, linkers are usually hydrophilic. Exemplary linkers include polymers such as polyethylene glycol, polyamides, poly(polyethylene glycol phosphates), polyalkyl phosphates, polyamines, and the like. Such linkers may have any suitable length.
- Fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands are immobilized on (attached to) carrier particles by any suitable means.
- fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands are each synthesized by nucleic acid polymerase-mediated template-dependent primer extension using sample template strands.
- a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is synthesized from a sample template nucleic acid strand in solution, before attachment of the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to a carrier particle.
- fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands are synthesized on the carrier particle by polymerase-mediated primer extension after a sample template nucleic acid strand has been hybridized to a complementary primer (acting as a “capture moiety”) attached to the carrier particle.
- the carrier particle comprises one or more oligonucleotides that are complementary to a sequence of a sample nucleic acid strand.
- the carrier particle comprises one or more oligonucleotides that are complementary to a sequence of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand.
- the one or more oligonucleotides are coupled by their 5 ’-ends to the carrier particle.
- the one or more oligonucleotides are coupled by their 3’- ends to the carrier particle.
- a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands may be synthesized on the carrier particle by polymerase-mediated template-dependent extension of the 3’ end (the 3 ’-hydroxyl) of the oligonucleotide as a primer.
- a sample nucleic acid is hybridized to the immobilized oligonucleotide such that the 3 ’-end of the oligonucleotide is hybridized to a sequence region that is upstream of the region of the sample nucleic acid strand to be sequenced.
- the polymerase synthesizes a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand that is complementary to the hybridized sample nucleic acid strand by extending the 3 ’-end of the immobilized oligonucleotide as a primer to incorporate complementary labeled nucleotides into a growing primer extension product that becomes the fluorescently labeled strand.
- the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands may be formed in solution using a non-immobilized primer.
- the primer is hybridized to a complementary sample nucleic acid sequence that is upstream of the region of the sample nucleic acid strand to be sequenced.
- the resulting hybridization complex (which comprises the sample nucleic acid strand hybridized to the newly synthesized fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand) may be contacted with a capture oligonucleotide that is already immobilized on the carrier particle, so that the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand becomes immobilized on the carrier particle by hybridization of the sample strand I fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand complex to the capture oligonucleotide.
- the resulting sample strand I fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand hybridization complex is immobilized on a carrier particle by hybridization of the capture oligonucleotide to a sequence in the sample nucleic acid strand.
- the resulting sample strand I fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand hybridization complex is immobilized on a carrier particle by hybridization of the capture oligonucleotide to a sequence in the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand.
- the sample strand I fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand hybridization complex may be immobilized on a carrier particle by hybridization of the capture oligonucleotide to a sequence in the primer that was used to synthesize the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand.
- the primer comprises a non-polynucleotide affinity moiety, such biotin or an antigen moiety
- the carrier particle comprises a streptavidin moiety or antibody moiety, so that after a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is formed in solution using a non-immobilized primer, the resulting sample strand I fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand hybridization complex is immobilized on the carrier particle by binding between the immobilized streptavidin moiety and the biotin moiety (or between the immobilized antibody and the antigen moiety).
- fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands of the invention are cleaved using one or more exonucleases.
- An exonuclease is selected to have substantially no endonuclease activity, to ensure that the exonuclease cleaves only single, consecutive mononucleotides from the distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand.
- the exonuclease may be a 3 ’-specific exonuclease or a 5 ’-specific exonuclease, and the exonuclease may cleave a fluorescently labeled strand that is provided in single- stranded or double- stranded form.
- exonucleases may be native (i.e., have a chemical structure found in nature) or modified relative to their native structures, and may be from their natural sources or from recombinant hosts.
- exonucleases may be chemically modified after isolation or purification, and may also be generated by combinatorial and recombinant techniques, including for example screening for exonucleases with desired properties.
- Exemplary 3 ’-specific exonucleases include, for example, E.
- Exemplary 5 ’-specific exonucleases include, for example, T7 exonuclease, the 5 ’-exonuclease activity of Taq DNA polymerase, the 5 ’-exonuclease activity of Epimark® Hot Start Taq DNA polymerase, and the 5 ’-exonuclease activity of Bst DNA polymerase.
- an exonuclease may cleave a strand that is present as a single strand or is present in a double stranded structure.
- yeast TatD exonuclease XI is able to cleave a nucleic acid strand in the 3’ to 5’ direction in a single-stranded form or a double-stranded form.
- Nucleases that have both 3 ’-exonuclease activity and 5 ’-exonuclease activity include, for example, E. coli DNA polymerase I, OneTaq® DNA polymerase, and Long Amp® Taq DNA polymerase. Such exonucleases may be used without modification to exploit one (e.g., 3’ to 5’) of their exonuclease activities to cleave fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands if none of the polynucleotide strands in the reaction mixture are cleavable by the other (e.g., 5’ to 3’) exonuclease activity.
- Exonucleases that have exonuclease activity towards single- stranded nucleic acids include, for example, E. coli RNAse T, E. coli exonuclease I, E. coli thermolabile exonuclease I, E.
- reaction conditions are selected to suppress those activities so that they do not interfere with polynucleotide sequencing according to the present invention.
- polymerization activity will be negligible or non-existent under exonuclease cleavage reaction conditions that do not include any of the standard nucleotide 5-triphosphates that are substrates for polymerization.
- a solid state substrate comprises a cis side and a trans side.
- the substrate comprises a reaction well that defines a reaction volume.
- the reaction well comprises (i) a proximal throughhole extending between the cis side and the trans side of the substrate, (ii) one or more side walls, and (iii) a distal opening.
- the solid state substrate further comprises an opaque metal layer that substantially blocks excitation light that is incident on the trans side of the substrate from penetrating into the reaction volume of the reaction well and from penetrating to the cis side of the substrate.
- Reaction wells for containing fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands to be sequenced may have any of a variety of shapes and sizes.
- reaction wells may also have elliptical, triangular, square, rectangular, pentagonal, hexagonal, octagonal or other regular or irregular cross-sectional shapes, with parallel or non-parallel side walls.
- the side walls of reaction wells having any of the foregoing shapes may be parallel, tapered, truncated-conical, or hour-glass shaped.
- a cylindrical well may be considered to have a single side wall that is inherently parallel with itself.
- Reaction wells may have any of a variety of dimensions that may be chosen by the user. The choice of specific dimensions can take into consideration a selected length and a minimum diameter of the fluorescently labeled strands that will be sequenced, whether the fluorescently labeled strands are in single- or double-stranded form, and any other relevant considerations.
- reaction wells The depth and minimum diameters of reaction wells are usually selected so that each reaction well can contain (1) a distal end of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to be sequenced and also (2) an exonuclease molecule that is bound to the distal end of the strand during nucleolytic cleavage of terminal mononucleotides.
- minimum diameter means the shortest diameter of a reaction well or of a throughhole, as applicable.
- a cylinder has a single diameter, which is the minimum diameter.
- the minimum diameter is the distance between (and perpendicular to) two opposing walls of the reaction well (the length of a side of the square cross-section), whereas the maximum diameter is the length of a diagonal across the square cross-section.
- the minimum diameter of the reaction well is the shortest dimension in a cross-section of the well.
- the distal opening, and at least a portion of the reaction well extending from the distal opening have a minimum diameter that satisfies requirements (1) and (2) above. Therefore, if the distal opening of a reaction well has a particular minimum diameter, then the minimum diameter of at least a portion of, or all of, the reaction well extending from the distal opening towards the throughhole of the well is equal to or greater than the minimum diameter of the distal opening of a reaction well.
- the reaction well, or the distal opening of the reaction well has a minimum diameter of at least 30 nm, or at least 40 nm, or at least 50 nm, or at least 60 nm, or at least 70 nm, or at least 80 nm, or at least 90 nm, or at least 100 nm. In some embodiments, the reaction well has a minimum diameter that is less than 150 nm, or less than 120 nm, or less than 100 nm, or less than 90 nm, or less than 80 nm.
- the reaction well has a minimum diameter of 30 nm to 250 nm, or 30 nm to 150 nm, or 30 nm to 120, or 30 nm to 100, or 30 nm to 90 nm, or 50 nm to 150 nm, or 50 nm to 120 nm, or 50 nm to 100 nm, or 50 nm to 90 nm, or 80 nm to 120 nm.
- the depth of the reaction well is usually selected to be longer than the length of the segment of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand that will be cleaved by the exonuclease to generate sequence information.
- Double- stranded DNA has a relatively rigid rod shape, with unit length of about one basepair per 3.6 Angstroms (0.36 nm). Therefore, a dsDNA segment that contains 1000 contiguous basepairs has a length of about 360 nm.
- a reaction well depth of 400 nm may be appropriate to enclose an immobilized 1000 bp dsDNA without exposing the distal end of the dsDNA to unwanted excitation light, and a well depth of 500 nm may provide even better protection from unwanted excitation light.
- a reaction well depth of 400 nm may enclose an immobilized fluorescently labeled strand having more than 1000 contiguous bases without exposing the distal end of the dsDNA to unwanted excitation light, since single-stranded nucleic acids are less rigid and have a smaller diameter than double-stranded nucleic acids.
- the reaction well has a well depth of at least 150 nm, or at least 200 nm, or at least 300 nm, or at least 400 nm, or at least 500 nm. In some embodiments, the reaction well has a well depth that is less than 1000 nm, or is less than 800 nm, or is less than 700 nm, or is less than 600 nm, or is less than 500 nm. In some embodiments, the reaction well has a well depth of 150 nm to 1000 nm, or 150 nm to 800 nm, or 150 nm to 700 nm, or 150 nm to 600 nm, or 150 nm to 500 nm.
- the reaction well has a well depth of 200 nm to 1000 nm, or 200 nm to 800 nm, or 200 nm to 700 nm, or 200 nm to 600 nm, or 200 nm to 500 nm. In some embodiments, the reaction well has a well depth of 300 nm to 1000 nm, or 300 nm to 800 nm, or 300 nm to 700 nm, or 300 nm to 600 nm, or 300 nm to 500 nm.
- the reaction well has a well depth of 400 nm to 1000 nm, or 400 nm to 800 nm, or 400 nm to 700 nm, or 400 nm to 600 nm, or 400 nm to 500 nm.
- the reaction well also comprises a proximal throughhole extending between the cis side and the trans side of the substrate.
- proximal means that the throughhole is closer to the cis side of the substrate than is the distal opening of the associated reaction well.
- Each proximal throughhole has a minimum diameter that is (1) sufficiently large to allow the distal end of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to be drawn into and through the throughhole by an electric field, and (2) is sufficiently small to prevent the carrier particle to which the fluorescently labeled strand is attached from passing through the throughhole to the trans side of the substrate.
- the minimum diameter of the proximal throughhole is sufficiently small to prevent any exonuclease molecules from passing through the proximal throughhole from the trans side to the cis side of the substrate.
- each proximal throughhole has a minimum diameter that is smaller than the smallest dimension of the exonuclease.
- the proximal throughhole has a minimum diameter of at least 2 nm. In some embodiments, the proximal throughhole has a minimum diameter of 2 nm to 50 nm, or 3 nm to 50 nm, or 5 nm to 50 nm, or 10 nm to 50 nm, or 20 nm to 50 nm, or 2 nm to 40 nm, or 3 nm to 40 nm, or 5 nm to 40 nm, or 10 nm to 40 nm, or 20 nm to 40 nm, or 3 nm to 30 nm, or 5 nm to 30 nm, or 10 nm to 30 nm, or 2 nm to 20 nm, or 3 nm to 20 nm, or 5 nm to 20 nm, or 10 nm to 20 nm, or 2 nm to 10 nm, or 3 nm to 10 nm, or 3 nm to 10
- the proximal throughhole has a longitudinal thickness of at least 10 nm, or at least 15 nm, or at least 20 nm, or from 10 to 60 nm, or from 10 to 50 nm or from 10 to 40 nm, or from 20 to 60 nm, or from 20 to 50 nm, or from 20 to 40 nm, or from 30 to 60 nm, or from 30 to 50 nm.
- the substrate comprises a thin membrane layer that contains the proximal throughhole.
- the thin membrane layer comprises silicon nitride (SiN).
- Substrates comprising reaction wells for use in the present inventions may be fabricated by any suitable method, in various forms of solid materials including but not being limited to silicones (e.g. SLN4, SiCh), metals, metal oxides (e.g. AI2O3) plastics, glass, semiconductor material, and combinations thereof. Fabrication techniques for making solid state substrates can be found in the following exemplary references that are incorporated by reference: Golovchenko et al, U.S. patent 6,464,842; Sauer et al, U.S. patent 7,001,792; Su et al, U.S.
- the solid state substrate comprises one or more light-blocking layers referred to herein as opaque metal layers.
- Each opaque metal layer reflects and/or absorbs incident light from the excitation beam, thereby (1) protecting the fluorescently labeled strands in the reaction well and on the cis side of the substrate from photobleaching and from other damage caused by incident light, and (2) preventing incident light from causing labels in the fluorescently labeled strands to fluoresce before being cleaved from the labeled strand by the exonuclease, potentially interfering with the correct fluorescent signals from cleaved fluorescently labeled mononucleotides.
- An opaque metal layer may comprise Sn, Al, V, Ti, Ni, Mo, Ta, W, Au, Ag or Cu, for example, and/or alloys or combinations thereof.
- an opaque metal layer comprises Al, Au, Ag or Cu.
- an opaque metal layer comprises aluminum (Al) or gold (Au).
- the composition of the opaque metal layer may be selected based on the wavelength-dependence of the metal’s reflectance of incident light. For fluorescence detection in the present invention, incident light is typically in the visible spectrum in the range of from about 380 nm to about 740 nm. Aluminum exhibits a reflectance of about 90% across the entire visible spectrum, making it a good candidate for use as an opaque layer.
- Gold exhibits a reflectance of about 35% for wavelengths between about 260 nm to about 480 nm and then rises sharply for wavelengths between about 480 nm to 700, exceeding about 90% for wavelengths greater than about 550 nm.
- gold has good light blocking characteristics across the visible spectrum, especially for wavelengths above about 480 nm, particularly in the red and infrared regions.
- Silver has a reflectance above about 80% for wavelengths above about 350 nm.
- the substrate comprises two or more opaque metal layers.
- the substrate may comprise a gold layer and an aluminum layer, both of which reflect and/or absorb incident light impinging on the trans side of the substrate.
- the substrate comprises a gold layer over an aluminum layer, such that the aluminum layer is closer to the cis side of the substrate than is the gold layer.
- a gold top layer which may also be referred to as an outer gold layer or distal gold layer, and which surrounds the distal opening of the reaction well
- gold can enhance the intensity of light excitation around the distal opening of the reaction well, thereby increasing the yield of fluorescent signals from each released fluorescently labeled mononucleotide that diffuses through the excitation zone.
- the substrate comprises a distal aluminum layer over a gold layer, such that the gold layer is closer to the cis side of the substrate than is the aluminum layer.
- the thickness of an opaque metal layer may vary and depends on the physical and chemical properties of material composing the opaque layer.
- the thickness of an opaque layer may be at least 40 nm, or at least 80 nm, or at least 120 nm, or at least 200 nm, or at least 300 nm.
- the thickness of an opaque layer may be in the range of from 50 to 700 nm; in other embodiments, the thickness of an opaque layer may be in the range of from 100 to 600 nm. If the substrate comprises more than one opaque metal layer, then “thickness” refers to the thickness of each individual layer.
- An opaque metal layer need not block (i.e. reflect or absorb) 100 percent of the light from an excitation beam.
- the opaque metal layer, or plurality of opaque metal layers if more than one layer is present blocks at least 30%, at least 50%, or at least 90%, or at least 95%, or at least 99%, or at least 99.5%, or at least 99.9% of the excitation light that is incident on the distal opening of a reaction well at a depth that is 50 nm from the proximal throughhole of the reaction well.
- Opaque layers may be fabricated by a variety of techniques. Material deposition techniques may be used including chemical vapor deposition, electrodeposition, epitaxy, thermal oxidation, physical vapor deposition, including evaporation and sputtering, casting, for example. In some embodiments, atomic layer deposition may be used, e.g. U.S. patent 6,464,842; Wei et al, Small, 6(13): 1406-1414 (2010), which are incorporated by reference. [0097]
- the solid state substrate may comprise other layers.
- a solid state substrate may comprise one or more non-opaque layers to increase the depth of the reaction well(s) in the substrate.
- Such a dielectric layer may comprise SiO 2 , TiO 2 , for example.
- a solid state substrate may comprise a thin adhesive layer between two other layers to enhance stability of the layers and deter delamination or other kinds of damage.
- a thin adhesive layer between a gold layer and an aluminum layer can enhance the adherence of the gold layer in the solid state substrate, as taught by Aouani et al., ACS Nano 3(7):2043-2048 (2009).
- Such a thin adhesive layer may comprise any suitable material, including for example chromium, titanium, titanium dioxide, chromium oxide, or nickel.
- a thin adhesive layer may have any suitable thickness.
- a thin adhesive layer may have a thickness from 1 nm to 40 nm, or 5 nm to 20 nm.
- the thin adhesive layer when a thin adhesive layer is tens or hundreds of nanometers from the distal opening of the reaction well, the thin adhesive layer has negligible or no effect on the fluorescence yield of fluorescently labeled mononucleotides diffusing through the excitation zone. In some embodiments, when a thin adhesive layer is near (e.g., within 10 or 20 or 30 nm of) the edge of distal opening of the reaction well, the thickness and composition of the thin adhesive layer may be selected to provide optimal enhancement of fluorescence excitation in the excitation zone.
- the solid state substrate comprises a plurality of thin adhesive layers.
- the solid state substrate may comprise a first thin adhesive layer between a first opaque metal layer and a second opaque metal layer, and a second thin adhesive layer between the second opaque metal layer and a dielectric layer such as SiCh or SiN.
- the solid state substrate comprises a multilayer structure having a plurality of layers for various purposes.
- Exemplary multilayer structure include a substrate having the following layers from cis side to trans side listed left to right:
- Throughholes may be fabricated in solid state membranes in a variety of materials including but not limited to, silicon nitride, silicon dioxide (SiO 2 ), and the like.
- silicon nitride is often symbolized as Si 2 N4 (indicating a Si:N stoichiometry of 3:4)
- silicon/nitrogen mixtures having other stoichiometric ratios of silicon and nitride may be used.
- a Si:N stoichiometry close to 3:4 but between 3:4 and 4:4 may have lower structural stress than Si N4.
- the methods and substrates of the present invention do not comprise or require protein nanopores or lipid bilayers, thereby avoiding their complexity and instability problems.
- Solid state throughholes may be prepared in a variety of ways, as exemplified in the references cited above.
- a helium ion microscope may be used to drill synthetic throughholes in a variety of materials, e.g. as disclosed by Yang et al, Nanotechnology, 22: 285310 (2011).
- a chip that supports one or more regions of a thin- film material, e.g. silicon nitride, that has been processed to be a free-standing membrane is introduced to the helium ion microscope (HIM) chamber.
- HIM motor controls are used to bring a free-standing membrane into the path of the ion beam while the microscope is set for low magnification.
- Beam parameters including focus and stigmation are adjusted at a region that is adjacent to the free-standing membrane, but on the solid substrate. Once the parameters have been properly fixed, the chip position is moved such that the freestanding membrane region is centered on the ion beam scan region and the beam is blanked.
- the HIM field of view is set to a dimension (in microns) that is sufficient to contain the entire anticipated reaction well pattern and sufficient to be useful in optical readout (i.e. dependent on optical magnification, camera resolution, etc.).
- the ion beam is then rastered once through the entire field of view at a pixel dwell time that results in a total ion dose sufficient to remove all or most of the membrane autofluorescence, if any (e.g., see WO 2014/066905).
- the field of view is then set to the proper value (smaller than that used above) to perform lithographically-defined milling of either a single throughhole or an array of throughholes that aligned with the corresponding reaction wells.
- the throughholes may be made to be coaxial, or not coaxial, with the corresponding reaction wells.
- the pixel dwell time of the pattern is set to result in throughholes of one or more predetermined diameters, which are optionally determined through the use of a calibration sample prior to sample processing. This entire process is repeated for each desired region on a single chip and/or for each chip introduced into the HIM chamber.
- the depth and diameter of a reaction well, together with the type(s) and thickness(s) of the one or more opaque metal layers of the substrate, may also be selected to achieve an acceptable level of, or to minimize, excitation light in the well away from the distal opening and towards the proximal throughhole.
- the intensity of light incident on the distal opening of a well becomes exponentially weaker as it progresses more deeply in to the well towards the throughhole, so that most of the reaction volume is substantially dark, especially near the proximal throughhole. This is particularly so when an opaque metal layer surrounds the distal opening of the reaction well.
- a benefit of this phenomenon is that a substantial portion or all of the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand in the reaction well is protected from unwanted excitation by incident light. This reduces background fluorescence and unwanted modification or degradation of the fluorescently labeled strand.
- a deeper well provides greater protection from the incident light, so that a greater proportion of the reaction well is substantially light-free than for a reaction well having the same diameter but smaller depth.
- a deeper well also provides more space for a longer fluorescently labeled strand to be sequenced.
- a well with a smaller distal opening provides greater darkness in the well away from the distal opening than is provided with a larger distal opening.
- Table 2 shows light intensities measured in a simulation using Lumerical (March 2020) software available from Lumerical Inc., Vancouver, Canada. More specifically, Intensity was calculated for a well depth 50 nm from the throughhole of the wells (having aluminum side walls) as a fraction of incident light intensity (640 nm) at the distal openings.
- each reaction well has a combination of depth and minimum diameter exemplified by the combinations in Table 3 below. Table 3
- the substrate especially surfaces of the substrate that will be in contact with reaction components may also be coated with one or more coatings to impart desirable properties, such as inertness, non-reactivity, or non-affinity towards buffer or reaction components such as exonuclease, fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands, released mononucleotides, and/or other reaction components or buffer components.
- desirable properties such as inertness, non-reactivity, or non-affinity towards buffer or reaction components such as exonuclease, fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands, released mononucleotides, and/or other reaction components or buffer components.
- one or more coatings may be applied to the surfaces of the substrate (also referred to herein as “inner surfaces” of the substrate) that may contact one or more buffer components and/or reaction components that are used or are generated in methods of the present invention.
- such coatings may help passivate surfaces of the reaction wells to reduce their affinity towards exonucleases and/or mononucleotides.
- Such coatings may also be used to protect metal components from oxidation or other degradative processes, or to reduce electroosmotic flow (EOF) of buffer ions along such surfaces that can create aqueous flow along the walls of the well.
- EEF electroosmotic flow
- the inner surfaces of the reaction well, the inner surfaces of the throughhole, or the inner surfaces of both the reaction well and throughhole comprise at least one coating.
- a single coating is applied.
- a plurality of coatings is applied.
- the coatings are the same.
- the coatings are not the same.
- Such coatings may have any suitable thickness selected by the user. For example, a coating may have a thickness from 1 nm to 20 nm, or from 1 nm and 10 nm, or from 2 nm to 10 nm, or from 5 nm to 10 nm.
- the coating thickness is substantially uniform, as may be provided by a variety of methods, such as atomic layer deposition (ALD).
- ALD atomic layer deposition
- a coating comprises an inorganic coating.
- an inorganic coating comprises a film comprising Hl'Ch, AI2O3, SiCh, TiCb, SiN, or Pt.
- Such a coating may be made by any suitable method. For example, such a coating may be added by ALD.
- Such coatings are particularly suitable for coating a variety of metal surfaces, such as aluminum, copper, and gold, and also for coating a variety of other types of material surfaces, such as silicon and silicon nitride.
- the substrate comprises a gold layer
- the gold surface may be coated with an organic thiolate compound. See for example Li et al., Bioconjugate Chem. 24(11): 1790-1797 (2013).
- the metal or metal oxide surface may be coated with a phosphonic acid-containing compound such as taught by Mutin et al., Chemical Materials 16:5670-5675 (2004), Gao et al., Langmuir 12:6429-6435 (1996), and Zoulalian et al., J. Physical Chemistry B 110:25603-25605 (2006).
- a phosphonic acid-containing compound such as taught by Mutin et al., Chemical Materials 16:5670-5675 (2004), Gao et al., Langmuir 12:6429-6435 (1996), and Zoulalian et al., J. Physical Chemistry B 110:25603-25605 (2006).
- the substrate comprises a dynamic coating comprising polyvinyl pyrrolidone, which may be present in the buffer in which the sequencing methods of the present invention is performed.
- a coating may be particularly suitable for coating SiN, SiCh, and metal oxides, for example.
- such a coating may reduce non-specific binding of exonuclease, mononucleotides, or other buffer or reaction components.
- the solid state substrate comprises a plurality of reaction wells as described in this disclosure, each of which may contain a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand for sequencing.
- the plurality of reaction wells may be arranged in any configuration, such as a random or non-random configuration, and are usually disposed in a plane.
- the reaction wells are configured as an array to facilitate the performance of a plurality of sequencing reactions in parallel .
- the array comprises a plurality of reaction wells arranged in a linear array.
- the array comprises a plurality of reaction wells arranged in a 2- dimensional array of rows and columns.
- reaction wells are spaced regularly, e.g., in a rectilinear pattern in which parallel rows are perpendicular to parallel columns (i.e., analogous to x and y axes that are 90 degrees apart).
- the rows are not perpendicular to the columns.
- the rows may be parallel to each other, but the columns may extend at a non-90 degree angle, such as 45 or 60 degrees relative to the rows.
- the reaction wells may be configured as a hexagonal array in which columns of wells extend from the rows at a 60 degree angle relative to the directions of the rows.
- adjacent wells in each row are separated by the same distance from each other.
- adjacent wells in each column are separated by the same distance from each other. In some embodiments, the spacing between adjacent wells in each row and column are separated by the same distance from each other. In some embodiments, the spacing between adjacent rows are different from the spacing between adjacent columns.
- each well is preferably separated from all other wells by a distance that permits fluorescent signals to be unambiguously detected from each well, without substantial interference from fluorescent signals from any other wells.
- the minimum distance between adjacent wells depends on (1) the longest wavelength of fluorescent light being detected, and (2) the pixel resolution of the signal detector.
- Optical resolution of light signals from two adjacent light sources is often considered to be achieved when the light sources are separated by a distance that is at least one half of the wavelength (X/2) of the detected light, even if the dimensions of light source are smaller than X/2 (e.g., when a reaction well has a diameter of 150 nm, 100 nm, or 80 nm).
- greater spacing may be preferred for better resolution to minimize cross-talk interference from light signals from adjacent wells.
- a minimum interwell distance of 350 nm (X/2) might be sufficient to provide adequate resolution of the two signals.
- a larger inter-well distance would likely improve signal resolution and detection accuracy.
- the signal detector may have any suitable pixel resolution that is deemed appropriate by the user. For example, if each pixel of a signal detector has an area of 100 nm x 100 nm, and each reaction well has a diameter of 100 nm, then the light signals from each well are usually collected using a plurality of detector pixels for each well (e.g., a 3 x 3 pixel area, or 4 x 4 pixel area, or 5 x 5 pixel area, per well), to capture most or all of the photons emitted from each well.
- a 3 x 3 pixel area, or 4 x 4 pixel area, or 5 x 5 pixel area, per well to capture most or all of the photons emitted from each well.
- reaction wells are separated by at least 1 micrometer, or by at least 1.3 micrometers, or by at least 1.5 micrometers, or by at least 1.7 micrometers, or by at least 2 micrometers.
- substrates having reaction well separation distances that are larger or smaller than these inter- well separation distances may also be used.
- the plurality of wells comprising an array of at least 10 times 10 reaction wells, or at least 30 times 30 reaction wells, or at least 100 times 100 reaction wells, or at least 500 times 500 reaction wells, or at least 1000 times 1000 reaction wells.
- the trans side of the substrate is illuminated with excitation light to create a fluorescence excitation zone adjacent to the distal opening of the reaction well.
- the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is reacted with an exonuclease so that mononucleotides are released serially from the distal end of the strand and diffuse through the fluorescence excitation zone, so that fluorescently labeled mononucleotides in the excitation zone emit fluorescent signals.
- the fluorescent signals are detected as a function of time, whereby a nucleotide sequence is determined from the time order of fluorescent signals detected from the released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides.
- the production and detection of fluorescent signals may be accomplished using any suitable detector.
- the detector comprises an excitation source that emits light to illuminate one or more sequencing reaction wells at the same time or at different times.
- the excitation light comprises light that is monochromatic, i.e., the light comprises a narrow wavelength range. If the excitation source emits light that is not monochromatic, the light may be passed through one or more filters to block undesired wavelengths from impinging on the reaction wells.
- Exemplary light sources include lasers (e.g., argon lasers), light emitting diodes, laser diodes, and lamps, such as xenon and mercury lamps.
- the detector comprises one or more free space lasers.
- the detector comprises one or more fibers coupled lasers. [0120] In some embodiments, the detector comprises a plurality of light sources, such as two or more lasers or light emitting diodes, each having a selected emission wavelength or emission wavelength range suitable for producing excitation light for exciting selected fluorescent labels of fluorescently labeled mononucleotides that diffuse through the excitation zone of each reaction well.
- the detector comprises a plurality of light sources, such as two or more lasers or light emitting diodes, each having a selected emission wavelength or emission wavelength range suitable for producing excitation light for exciting selected fluorescent labels of fluorescently labeled mononucleotides that diffuse through the excitation zone of each reaction well.
- the excitation light is circularly polarized. In some embodiments, the excitation light is linearly polarized. In some embodiments, the excitation light is non-polarized. In some embodiments, the excitation light comprises light having a wavelength of 488 nm. In some embodiments, the excitation light comprises light having a wavelength of 532 nm. In some embodiments, the excitation light comprises light having a wavelength of 640 nm. In some embodiments, the excitation light comprises light having a wavelength of 730 nm.
- the excitation light is collimated to illuminate one or more reaction wells, such a plurality of reaction wells that ay be configured as an array.
- the excitation light is focused, such as in a confocal microscope configuration, which may be used for example for detection of fluorescent signals from a single reaction well.
- the excitation wavelengths may be tailored to balance the relative intensities of emitted light from the different fluorescent labels.
- Another way to balance the relative intensities of emitted light from the different fluorescent labels is to select the different fluorescent labels based upon the excitation wavelengths produced by the light source or light sources. For example, the intensity of a fluorescent signal emitted by a fluorescent label may be reduced by exciting the label at a wavelength that is shorter than the label’s wavelength of maximum absorption (/.max, abs) corresponding to the label’s fluorescence emission wavelength.
- the different fluorescent labels and light source(s) may also be selected to balance and optimize the resolution of emission signals of the different fluorescent labels. This can be accomplished by choosing labels with emission wavelengths that are as far apart from each other as deemed necessary to distinguish signals from the different labels. For example, in some embodiments, labels are chosen with emission wavelength maxima that are at least 20 nm, or at least 25 nm, or at least 30 nm, greater or less than the nearest emission wavelength maxima of the other labels in the fluorescently labeled nucleotides. The choice of labels may also depend on the excitation wavelengths provided by the one or more light sources. [0124] Fluorescence detection may be accomplished using any of a variety of detection modes.
- Suitable light detectors include, for example, avalanche photodiode detectors; photomultipliers; charge-coupled devices (CCDs), such as intensified CCDs (iCCDs) and electron-multiplying CCDs (emCCDs); complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) detectors; confocal microscopes; and diode array detectors.
- CCDs charge-coupled devices
- iCCDs intensified CCDs
- emCCDs electron-multiplying CCDs
- CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor
- detectors such as CCDs and diode arrays comprise a 2-dimensional array of pixels for collecting fluorescent signals from the reaction wells.
- the fluorescent signals from a reaction well are usually collected by multiple pixels in the detector, to maximize the collection of photons from that well so that each fluorescent label may be correctly identified.
- the pixels are usually designed to detect photons over a spectrum of wavelengths that encompass the wavelengths of all of the fluorescent labels that will be released by exonucle
- Fluorescence signals are usually monitored continuously for greatest yield of the detected fluorescent signals. Fluorescence signals are detected and/or recorded using a frame rate that is faster than the duration of fluorescent signals emitted by each released mononucleotides passing through the excitation zone.
- the frame rate may be selected by taking into account fluorescent signal strengths and durations of individual photons or photon bursts emitted by the fluorescently labeled mononucleotides. Fluorescence signals are usually measured after subtraction of background/baseline fluorescence that is measured in the absence of fluorescent mononucleotides.
- Substrate 200 comprises a cis side 202a and a trans side 202b.
- Substrate 200 further comprises a reaction well 204 that defines a reaction volume 206.
- Reaction well 204 comprises (i) a proximal throughhole 208 extending between the cis side and the trans side of the substrate, (ii) one or more side walls 210a and 210b, and (iii) a distal opening 212.
- Proximal throughhole 208 which may be cylindrical or non-cylindrical, may be provided as an opening passing through a thin membrane layer 214.
- Solid state substrate 200 further comprises an opaque metal layer 216 that substantially blocks excitation light from penetrating into the reaction volume and from penetrating from the trans side to the cis side of the substrate.
- reaction well 204 is cylindrical, although reaction wells may have other, non-cylindrical shapes.
- Reaction volume 206 is defined and enclosed by side walls 210a of layer 216, by side walls 210b of thin membrane layer 214, and by the diameter of the reaction well, which is indicated by a dotted horizontal doubleheaded arrow spanning distal opening 212.
- the depth of reaction well 204 is illustrated by a dotted vertical double-headed arrow 218.
- the minimum diameter of each reaction well should be large enough to allow at least one exonuclease molecule to diffuse, from the trans side of the substrate, through the distal opening and into the reaction well, and to bind to and digest the distal end of the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand.
- the minimum diameter of each reaction well is or may be made to be at least as large as the smallest dimension or cross-section of the exonuclease that is used.
- a minimum diameter of 50 nm or 100 nm or 150 nm are each sufficiently large to provide ample space for an exonuclease to diffuse into a reaction well and serially digest mononucleotides from the distal end of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand.
- cis side 202a is associated with an anodic (negatively charged) electrode
- trans side 202b of substrate 200 is associated with a cathodic (positively charged) electrode.
- the cis and trans sides of the solid substrate are contacted with one or more aqueous buffers.
- the buffers on the cis and trans sides of the substrate may be the same except for the presence of carrier particles (if present) on the cis side and exonuclease molecules (if present) on the trans side.
- the buffers on the cis and trans sides of the substrate are different from each other.
- Buffer compositions are provided that are suitable for the sequencing methods of the present invention.
- buffers typically contain buffer molecules, such as HEPES, MOPS, Tris, and phosphate, for example, to maintain a selected pH (e.g., see Sigma- Aldrich Catalog regarding "Good buffers"). Buffer molecule concentrations of 5 mM to 100 m are typically useful, although higher or lower concentrations can also be used.
- Salts and other additives such as NaCl, LiCl, KC1, and glycerol (e.g., 10 mM KC1 to 1 M KC1 and/or 1-60 or 1-70 volume percent glycerol) and the like can also be included if desired, as well as appropriate cofactors for the particular enzymes that are used (e.g., MgCh or MnCh for some exonucleases).
- buffer compositions are constituted to maintain the pH substantially constant at a value in the range of 6.0 to 8.8, although buffers with higher or lower pH values may also be used.
- Buffer 1 or Buffer 2 may be used as follows, in which DTT is dithio threitol, Ac is acetate, and BSA is bovine serum albumin: Buffer 1: 10 mM Bis-Tris-Propane-HCl, 10 mM MgCh, 1 mM DTT, pH 7.5 at 25°C. Buffer 2: 50 mM KAc, 20 mM Tris-Ac, 10 mM MgAc 2 , 100 pg/mL BSA, pH 7.9 at 25°C. [0133] Another buffer that may be used for T4 exonuclease is Buffer 3:
- Buffer 3 50 mM NaCl, 10 mM Tris-HCl, 10 mM MgCl 2 , 100 pg/mL BSA pH 7.9 at 25°C.
- an aqueous solution comprising one or more carrier particles, each comprising one or more attached fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands, is contacted with the cis side 202a of substrate 200.
- Each fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises (i) a proximal end that is attached to the carrier particle, (ii) a distal end that is cleavable by an exonuclease, and (iii) at least one fluorescently labeled nucleotide comprising a fluorescent label.
- a voltage bias is applied across the substrate using a set of electrodes that establish an electric field from the cis to the trans side of the substrate, typically with one or more anodic electrodes (anodes) on the cis side and one or more cathodic electrodes (cathodes) on the trans side of the substrate.
- the electric field attracts a carrier particle to the throughhole of a reaction well, so that the distal end of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand on the carrier particle is drawn into and through the proximal throughhole into the reaction volume of a reaction well.
- the carrier particle does not pass through the throughhole. Since the smallest dimensions of the carrier particles are larger than the smallest diameter of a throughhole, or the carrier particles are otherwise too large to pass through the throughhole, the carrier particles remain on the cis side of the substrate. Furthermore, when the throughholes are dimensioned to allow only one fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to enter each reaction well via a throughhole, or if the carrier particle has a sufficiently low loading density of fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands, only one fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is present in the reaction well for digestion by an exonuclease molecule.
- the carrier particle and attached fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand may be held (maintained) in place by maintaining a mild voltage bias across the substrate (between the cis and trans sides) to keep the carrier particle adjacent to, or pressed against, the cis side of the throughhole.
- the carrier particle is not covalently bonded to the throughhole.
- the voltage bias is sufficiently mild that it does not cause the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to be released from the carrier particle.
- the mild voltage bias may be the same as, or different from, the voltage bias that is used to attract the carrier particle to a throughhole to deliver an attached polynucleotide strand to a reaction well.
- FIG. 2B shows an exemplary reaction well in which a carrier particle 220 has been moved by an electric field (by a voltage bias) to a location adjacent to the cis side of throughhole 208.
- Carrier particle 220 comprises three fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands 222a, 222b, and 222c. Each strand is attached to the carrier particle by a proximal end, as illustrated for strand 222a by proximal end 224a, and a distal end that is cleavable by an exonuclease, as illustrated for strand 222a by distal end 226a.
- Strand 222a has a contiguous nucleotide sequence 5 ’ - ACTGGGTTCCAGTTACCCTGGA-3’ (SEQ ID NO.: 1), wherein the 5’-end is attached to carrier particle 220, and the 3 ’-adenylate (A) is the distal end.
- all of the nucleotides in strands 222a, 222b, and 222c are fluorescently labeled nucleotides each of which comprises a different fluorescent label that distinguishes each kind of nucleotide (A, C, G and T) from the other kinds of nucleotides.
- strand 222a in Figure 2B is shown as having only a single-stranded form, it will be appreciated that a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand may instead be provided in double-stranded form, or may also comprise one or more single-stranded and double-stranded regions.
- a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand 222a were fully double-stranded, it would be hybridized to a complementary strand comprising the sequence 5’-TCCAGGGTAACTGGAACCCAGT-3’ (SEQ ID NO.: 2) as shown below, where base pairing between complementary nucleotides is represented by vertical lines:
- an exonuclease may be introduced by contacting a second aqueous solution that comprises exonuclease molecules with trans side 202b of substrate 200 so that an exonuclease molecule, in this case a 3 ’-specific single-strand-cleaving exonuclease for cleaving strand 222a, can bind to the distal end of the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand in a reaction well, cleave mononucleotides and release them serially from the distal end of the strand.
- an exonuclease molecule in this case a 3 ’-specific single-strand-cleaving exonuclease for cleaving strand 222a
- Exonuclease molecule 230 binds distal end 226a of polynucleotide strand 222a and cleaves the phosphodiester linkage (indicated by arrow 232a) between a 3 ’-terminal A nucleotide and an immediately adjacent G nucleotide.
- fluorescence excitation zone 250 which is illustrated as a shaded region spanning across the diameter of the distal opening and extending both outside and inside the reaction volume of the reaction well, does not have discrete boundaries. Rather, the intensity of incident light in the excitation zone is most concentrated in the vicinity of the distal opening, approximately as shown in Figure 2A, and rapidly diminishes at positions further within or outside of (above) the reaction well (for example, see Table 2 and related discussion above).
- the diameter of the excitation zone is the same, or substantially the same, as the diameter of the distal opening of the reaction well. In other words, the excitation zone does not extend to regions of the solid state substrate beyond the diameter of the distal opening.
- the 3-dimensional intensity profile of incident light for a reaction well will also depend on the composition(s) and other characteristics of the solid state substrate material(s) around the well (e.g., aluminum, gold, or other material).
- adjacent to the distal opening of the reaction well is intended to refer to the space that is both immediately above and immediately below the plane that passes across the distal opening (and defines the distal end of the reaction volume), such as depicted edge-on by arrow 212 in Figure 2A, and any other nearby illuminated space within the reaction well that causes emission of detectable fluorescent signals by released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides diffusing through that space.
- a released mononucleotide 228a diffuses out of the reaction volume and through fluorescence excitation zone 250.
- fluorescently labeled mononucleotide 228a While in the excitation zone, fluorescently labeled mononucleotide 228a emits fluorescent signals in the form of multiple (a plurality of) photons (hv) that are detected as an adenylate mononucleotide by a detector (see Figure 2, discussed further below).
- passive diffusion provides a sufficient mechanism by which released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides can reach the excitation zone for fluorescence excitation and detection.
- the present invention excludes, active bulk flow of aqueous solution into or out of the reaction well during exonuclease cleavage and detection.
- the released fluorescently labeled mononucleotide 228b diffuses out of the reaction volume and through fluorescence excitation zone 250, emitting fluorescent signals (hv) that are detected by a detector as a guanylate mononucleotide.
- Exonuclease 230 is then ready to cleave the next 3 ’-terminal mononucleotide from strand 222c in the same way as for the first two 3 ’-mononucleotides.
- mononucleotides are released one-by-one, some of which (or all of which, in the case of strands 222abc in Figures 2B-2D) are fluorescently labeled mononucleotides.
- the released mononucleotides exit the reaction wells by diffusion at a rate that is much greater than the cleavage rate of the exonuclease, so that the released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides serially enter and pass through the excitation zone into bulk solution on the trans side of the reaction well.
- Unproductive diffusion of mononucleotides through the proximal throughhole is substantially avoided due to blockage of the proximal throughhole by the carrier particle that is attached to the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand.
- an exonuclease molecule dissociates from a fluorescently labeled strand before the fluorescently labeled strand has been completely digested, then another exonuclease from solution binds to the distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand and continues digestion. Digestion continues until the fluorescently labeled strand is so short that the exonuclease stops digesting the fluorescently labeled strand or until the cleavage reaction or illumination is otherwise terminated.
- Exonuclease-mediated digestion of the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands is allowed to proceed for a selected digestion time, or until the yield of reliable fluorescent signals has diminished by a certain amount or below a selected minimum quantity threshold or quality threshold.
- the reaction wells may be re-loaded with new fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands by applying a reverse voltage bias to the substrate to move the carrier particle away from the throughholes, so that any remaining fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands are removed from the reaction volumes, and then applying a new voltage bias to (across) the substrate to reload each reaction well with a different fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands into each the reaction well (i.e., so that the distal end of a different fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is delivered into each the reaction well) for reacting with an exonuclease.
- the new fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands that are loaded into the reaction wells may be from the same or different carrier particles relative to the carrier particles that provided fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands in the previous exonuclease cleavage round.
- Multiple rounds (cycles) of loading fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands into reaction wells and sequencing the strands using exonuclease- mediated cleavage may be performed until a desired amount of sequence data has been collected or until the sequencing cycles are no longer sufficiently productive.
- reaction wells are loaded with fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands using a voltage bias of about 250 mV to 500 mV to move the attached carrier particles to the throughholes of the reaction wells, although smaller or larger voltage biases may also be used.
- carrier particles are held adjacent to the throughholes using a voltage of about 250 mV to 500 mV, although smaller or larger voltage biases can also be used.
- carrier particles are moved away (‘ejected”) from reaction wells using a voltage bias of about -250 mV to -500 mV, although smaller or larger negative voltage biases may also be used.
- One advantage of re-using the carrier particles to deliver multiples fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands to one or more reaction wells is that a large number of fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand can be sequenced from a single solid state substrate and single nucleic acid sample. Another advantage is that collecting sequence data from a greater proportion of the total nucleic acid sample population can improve the completeness of the sequence data, reduce gaps, and/or increase the collection of redundant sequence data to align sequences and formulate optimal consensus sequences.
- FIG. 3 An exemplary sequencing apparatus 300 comprising a solid state substrate of the invention is illustrated in Figure 3.
- a substrate 302 having a cis side and a trans side is placed adjacent to a microscope objective lens 322, such that the trans side of the substrate faces the lens.
- Excitation light is delivered to, and fluorescent light signals are received from, the excitation zone of one or more reaction wells in substrate 302.
- Light paths are illustrated by dotted lines.
- the apparatus also comprises excitation light sources 304a and 304b to provide excitation light having selected wavelengths, such as wavelengths of 532 nm and 640 nm, respectively, that are selected to excite fluorescent labels of mononucleotides that are released from a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand by exonuclease activity.
- the apparatus comprises two fiber-coupled laser light sources 304a and 304b.
- Excitation light beams having different wavelengths from sources 304a and 304b are passed through wavelength combiner (WC) 306 (a fiber based wavelength combiner), fiber optic connector 308, collimating lens 310 (e.g., an achromatic doublet lens, Thorlabs #AC254- 060-A), optional shutter 311, and then through quarter wave plate 312 (e.g., an achromatic quarter wave plate, Thorlabs AQWP05M-600), to convert the linearly polarized beam from the lasers into a circularly polarized beam.
- WC wavelength combiner
- collimating lens 310 e.g., an achromatic doublet lens, Thorlabs #AC254- 060-A
- optional shutter 311 e.g., an achromatic quarter wave plate, Thorlabs AQWP05M-600
- microscope objective 322 is an oil immersion microscope objective (e.g., Olympus APON60XOTIRF).
- objective 322 is a water immersion microscope objective.
- objective 322 is an air microscope objective.
- fluorescence excitation zones see Figures 2B-2D
- the mononucleotides diffuse through the excitation zone and emit fluorescent light in response to the excitation light.
- the emitted fluorescent light is collected and focused by microscope objective 322 and is reflected by mirror 320 through multiband dichroic beamsplitter 318, through multiband emission filter 324 (e.g., Chroma Technology ZET 532/640m) to dichroic beamsplitter 326 (e.g., Chroma Technology T6351pxr).
- multiband emission filter 324 e.g., Chroma Technology ZET 532/640m
- dichroic beamsplitter 326 e.g., Chroma Technology T6351pxr
- the emitted fluorescent light that passes through dichroic beamsplitter 326 is focuses by lens 328a (e.g., Olympus SWTLU-C tube lens) and then onto detector camera 330a for detection; and emitted fluorescent light that is reflected by dichroic beamsplitter 326 is focuses by lens 328b and then onto detector camera 330b for detection (e.g., Hamamatsu C13440- 20CU Orca Flash 4.0).
- Detector cameras 330a and 330b are preferably synchronized to properly detect the time order of fluorescent signals from the released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides.
- the two cameras may be replaced with a single camera, and a prism may be used instead of a focusing lens 328a, by which emitted light signals are angularly separated by wavelength onto different regions of the detector field for individual quantification and identification of nucleotide-specific fluorescent signals.
- a third and fourth camera may be included with attendant lenses and beam splitters to capture more than two different fluorescent signals.
- Sequencing apparatus for use in the present invention may also comprise a computer and software for collecting and processing fluorescent signal data.
- the non-illuminated fluorescent nucleotides in that portion of the fluorescently labeled strand do not emit fluorescent light signals, or if they do, such signals are negligible. Only fluorescent mononucleotides that are excited while in the excitation zone emit a fluorescent signal that is detected by the detector. Also, if the distal opening is defined by a side wall comprising gold, then excitation intensity of the incident light may be greater than for aluminum, providing an enhancement of fluorescence, in other words, a greater flux of fluorescent photons for detection.
- the excitation light that impinges on the distal openings of each reaction well may be oriented so as to be orthogonal to the substrate surface, in other words, parallel to the central axis of each reaction well, e.g., when the reaction wells are cylindrical in shape.
- the excitation light that impinges on the distal opening of each reaction well may be oriented so as to be non-orthogonal to the substrate surface.
- the wavelength of the excitation light is also selected to be compatible with the fluorescent labels of the released mononucleotides, so that when the excitation light impinges on each fluorescent label, the fluorescent label absorbs the excitation light and then emits photons having a wavelength that is longer (lower energy) than the wavelength of the excitation light.
- the difference between the wavelength of maximum absorption and the wavelength of maximum emission associated with a fluorescent label is known as the Stokes shift.
- Fluorescence signals are detected using a detector frame rate that is faster than the shortest time windows during which fluorescently labeled mononucleotides emit individual photons or photon bursts while they diffuse through the excitation zone.
- released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides enter the excitation zone within 10, or within 20, or within 50 milliseconds, whereas they are released one-by-one by exonuclease-mediated cleavage at time intervals between about 100 milliseconds and about 10 seconds.
- released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides enter the excitation zone within 10 milliseconds after being cleaved from a fluorescently labeled strand.
- Frame rates may also be selected based in part on the size and speed of memory, signal to noise, and fluorescent signal strength.
- Exonuclease cleavage rates and the diffusion times (or diffusion speeds) of released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides may be adjusted by varying reaction parameters such as pH, viscosity, temperature, and choice of exonuclease.
- viscosity may be increased by including a viscous additive such as glycerol, e.g., at a concentration of from 1% to 60% (v:v), or from 1% to 70% (v:v), or from 50% to 70% (v:v), in an aqueous buffer on the trans side of the substrate.
- an aqueous buffer on the trans side of the substrate comprises about 50% to about 60% glycerol (v:v), or about 50% to 70% (v:v), or about 50% glycerol (v:v), or about 60% glycerol (v:v), or about 70% glycerol (v:v).
- the presence of an increased viscosity in and around the detection zone can help reduce mononucleotide diffusion speeds (and provide longer mononucleotide dwell times) during fluorescence detection, providing several benefits, such as (1) higher fluorescence signals due to the collection of more emitted photons for each fluorescent mononucleotide passing through the detection zone, (2) higher signal to noise, (3) the ability to use lower laser power if desired, thereby generating less heat, (4) less cross-contamination (if any) from fluorescent mononucleotides diffusing from a reaction well towards an adjacent reaction well, (5) and the ability to use place reaction wells more closely together in an array.
- Each released fluorescently labeled mononucleotide may be identified (e.g., as A, C, G or T) from the characteristics of the measured fluorescent signal, such as (1) the particular emission wavelength or peak shape of fluorescence of the fluorescent label associated with each different kind of nucleotide, (2) signal intensity, which may be measured as a sum of multiple photons from the same mononucleotide during transit through the excitation zone of a reaction well, and (3) the absence of contributions of fluorescence signals from any other released mononucleotide.
- characteristics of the measured fluorescent signal such as (1) the particular emission wavelength or peak shape of fluorescence of the fluorescent label associated with each different kind of nucleotide, (2) signal intensity, which may be measured as a sum of multiple photons from the same mononucleotide during transit through the excitation zone of a reaction well, and (3) the absence of contributions of fluorescence signals from any other released mononucleotide.
- fluorescently labeled mononucleotides that diffuse out of the excitation zone of a first reaction well into the excitation zone of a second reaction zone can be excluded from the fluorescent signals detected for the second well based on the trajectory of movement of the fluorescently labeled mononucleotide towards the second well.
- fluorescently labeled mononucleotides that diffuse out of, and then return to, the excitation zone of a first reaction well can be excluded from the fluorescent signals detected for the first well based on the trajectory of movement of the fluorescently labeled mononucleotide returning towards the first well.
- the fluorescently labeled mononucleotides that are used in the present invention may be selected to be moderately susceptible to photobleaching under the illumination conditions of the substrate, so that fluorescently labeled mononucleotides that diffuse out of the excitation zone are substantially bleached, and thus rendered non- fluorescent, by the incident excitation light after the mononucleotide label has been detected in the excitation zone of the first reaction well, before it returns to the same excitation zone or diffuses to another excitation zone. Fluorescence signals from inactive reaction wells can be disregarded by computer software.
- Sequences may be assembled from sequence data obtained from multiple polynucleotide fragments that contain the same or overlapping sequence regions.
- determination of a polynucleotide sequence includes determining sequences of subsets of the full set of four natural nucleotides, A, C, G and T for DNA (or A, C, G or U for RNA), such as, for example, a sequence of only A's and C's of a target polynucleotide.
- determination of a polynucleotide sequence includes the determination of the identities, order, and locations of one, two, three or all of the four types of nucleotides within a target polynucleotide.
- determination of a polynucleotide sequence includes the determination of the identities, order, and locations of two, three or all of the four types of nucleotides within a target polynucleotide. In some embodiments, determination of a polynucleotide sequence includes determining one or more subsequences of a target polynucleotide that serve as a fingerprint for the target polynucleotide, such as subsequences that uniquely identify a target polynucleotide, or a class of target polynucleotides, within a set of polynucleotides, e.g. all different RNA sequences expressed by a cell.
- kits that may be useful in performing methods of the invention.
- a kit may be any delivery system for delivering materials or reagents for carrying out a method of the invention.
- delivery systems include systems that allow for the storage, transport, or delivery of reaction reagents (e.g., nucleotide 5 ’-triphosphates comprising fluorescent labels, such as mutually quenching fluorescent labels, enzymes, carrier particles, etc. in the appropriate containers) and/or supporting materials (e.g., buffers, written instructions for performing the assay etc.) from one location to another.
- reaction reagents e.g., nucleotide 5 ’-triphosphates comprising fluorescent labels, such as mutually quenching fluorescent labels, enzymes, carrier particles, etc. in the appropriate containers
- supporting materials e.g., buffers, written instructions for performing the assay etc.
- kits include one or more enclosures (e.g., boxes) containing the relevant reaction reagents and/or supporting materials.
- a first container may contain an enzyme for use in an assay, while a second or more containers contain mutually quenching fluorescent labels.
- a kit may include one or more of the following: an exonuclease, a template-dependent DNA polymerase or RNA polymerase, one or more fluorescently labeled nucleotide 5’- triphosphates, buffers, and carrier particles that comprise affinity labels such as avidin, streptavidin, polynucleotides that are complementary to polynucleotides that are to be sequenced, etc.
- single or multiple (2 - 6) thiol groups are attached on either the 3 ’ or 5 ’ end of the oligonucleotide (5’-GCTATGTGGCGCGGTATTAT-3’) (SEQ ID NO.: 3).
- Two thiol groups are introduced via conjugation of commercially available 3’- or 5’ - amino-functionalized oligonucleotide (IDT, Iowa or TriLink) with ( ⁇ )-a-lipoic acid.
- multiple thiols are introduced with 1, 2 or 3 consecutive DTPA phosphoramidites on either 3’- or 5 ’-end of oligonucleotide (IDT, Iowa).
- an appropriate complementary conjugation groups (amine, thiol, DBCO, BCN) is attached to either the 3’ or 5’ end of the oligonucleotide.
- Linkers of various lengths are introduced between the conjugation moiety and the oligonucleotide in order to facilitate access of enzymes (e.g., access to a polymerase if a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand complementary to a sample nucleic acid strand will be synthesized by DNA or RNA polymerase using a template that is immobilized on the carrier particle) oligonucleotides to the oligonucleotide sequence.
- enzymes e.g., access to a polymerase if a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand complementary to a sample nucleic acid strand will be synthesized by DNA or RNA polymerase using a template that is immobilized on the carrier particle
- Purified oligonucleotides are mixed with gold nanoparticles (10 nm, 15 nm, 50 nm, and 100 nm diameter from Sigma- Aldrich) at various molar ratios (100:1, 300:1, 500:1, 1000:1, 3000:1, 10000:1, 20000:1, etc.) and the pH is adjusted to 4.3 with 50 mM citrate-HCl buffer, or to pH 7.4 or pH 8 with 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer.
- Tween 20 is added to a final concentration of 0.02%, 0.05% or 0.1%, or instead of Tween 20, SDS is added to a final concentration of 0.01%, 0.025%, or 0.05%.
- a water-soluble oligo(ethylene glycol) -alkylthiol where oligo(ethylene glycol) is PEG3 or PEG6, and alkyl is (CH2)s - (CH2)i2, is added to the reaction mixture (variable ratios relative to thiol-modified oligonucleotide: 1:1, 4:1, 10:1, 25:1, 100:1) and the reaction mixture is incubated for 15 min to 24 hours.
- Oligonucleotide-nanoparticle conjugates are harvested by centrifuging and multiple washing with appropriate buffer (e.g. 10 mM phosphate buffer pH 8 with 0.02% Tween 20). Nanoparticles are stored at 4 °C in the same washing buffer before further use.
- appropriate buffer e.g. 10 mM phosphate buffer pH 8 with 0.02% Tween 20
- oligonucleotides are released from nanoparticles via etching with KCN I K3[Fe(CN)e] mixture or DTT. Released oligonucleotides are quantified with a fluorometer using SYBRTM Gold or OliGreenTM (ThermoFisher Scientific) as a staining agent.
- oligonucleotides For internally labeled oligonucleotides that are obtained by primer extension in presence of at least one fluorescently labeled (Cy3, Cy5, Cy7, Alexa Fluor 488 etc.) deoxynucleotide triphosphate (dATP, dCTP, dGTP or dUTP), intrinsic absorbance or fluorescence is used as a readout for quantification after nucleotide release from nanoparticles. Alternatively, reversible hybridization of suitably labeled complementary oligonucleotide is used for quantification.
- fluorescently labeled Cy3, Cy5, Cy7, Alexa Fluor 488 etc.
- deoxynucleotide triphosphate dATP, dCTP, dGTP or dUTP
- intrinsic absorbance or fluorescence is used as a readout for quantification after nucleotide release from nanoparticles.
- reversible hybridization of suitably labeled complementary oligonucleotide
- Table 4 shows DNA loading data obtained with carrier particles comprising different quantities of an oligonucleotide 5’- GCTATGTGGCGCGGTATTAT-3’ (SEQ ID NO: 3, supra) as a capture moiety and/or primer conjugated to gold nanoparticles for use in subsequent primer extension with fluorescent dNTPs or for annealing with primer extension products prepared separately.
- carrier particles comprising different quantities of an oligonucleotide 5’- GCTATGTGGCGCGGTATTAT-3’ (SEQ ID NO: 3, supra) as a capture moiety and/or primer conjugated to gold nanoparticles for use in subsequent primer extension with fluorescent dNTPs or for annealing with primer extension products prepared separately.
- T4O is a 40-mer of thymidines
- Au particle vendors were Sigma Aldrich (SA), Ted Pella (TP), and Cytodiagnostics (C); conjugation conditions were (1) phosphate pH 7.4 followed by IM NaCl overnight (salt aging), or (2) 50 mM citrate-HCl pH 4.3.
- Carboxylic acid- functionalized nanoparticles (commercially available quantum dots, polymer-coated gold or iron oxide nanoparticles - e.g., P/N 900226, 747254, 765481, 900475 from Sigma- Aldrich, P/N Q21301MP from ThermoFisher Scientific, P/N MP25-CA from Nanocs or P/N SC0050 from Ocean Nanotech) are suspended in sodium borate buffer (pH 8-9) and treated with N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N'-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (EDC-HC1; 100 - 2000 eq) and N-hydroxysulfosuccinimide (sulfo-NHS, 100-2000 eq) for 1 to 2 hours at ambient temperature.
- EDC-HC1 N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N'-
- amino-functionalized DNA (1 eq) is added to the mixture.
- 4M NaCl is added in small portions up to 0.15 M - 0.5 M (depending on the colloidal stability of particular nanoparticles).
- the reaction mixture is incubated for 3 to 24 hours.
- DNA-nanoparticle conjugates are purified by centrifuging and subsequent washing or by size-exclusion chromatography followed by dialysis.
- Carboxylic acid-functionalized nanoparticles (commercially available quantum dots, polymer-coated gold or iron oxide nanoparticles - e.g., P/N 900226, 747254, 765481, 900475 from Sigma- Aldrich; P/N Q21301MP from ThermoFisher Scientific; P/N MP25-CA from Nanocs or P/N SC0050 from Ocean Nanotech) are coupled with an appropriate azido-amine per the protocol above.
- Azido-functionalized nanoparticles (prepared above) are mixed with 3’ - or 5’ - DBCO (dibenzocyclooctyne)- or BCN (bicyclooctyne)-functionalized DNA (commercially available from IDT or prepared from 3’- or 5’ - amino-functionalized DNA via coupling with corresponding NHS ester, e.g. P/N A102 from Click Chemistry Tools or P/N BP-22851 from BroadPharm) in appropriate reaction buffer (10 mM - 50 mM sodium phosphate, pH 7 - pH 8). Optionally, 4 M NaCl is added in small portions up to 0.15 M - 0.5 M (depending on the colloidal stability of particular nanoparticles). The reaction mixture is incubated for 3 to 24 hours. DNA- nanoparticle conjugates are purified by centrifuging and subsequent washing or by sizeexclusion chromatography followed by dialysis.
- Amine-functionalized nanoparticles (commercially available quantum dots, polymer-coated gold or iron oxide nanoparticles - e.g., P/N 900290, 765341, 747327 from Sigma Aldrich) are coupled with succinimidyl 4-(N-maleimidomethyl) cyclohexane- 1-carboxylate (SMCC) at pH 7.0 - pH 7.4 following an established protocol (e.g. Thermo Fisher).
- SMCC succinimidyl 4-(N-maleimidomethyl) cyclohexane- 1-carboxylate
- Maleimide-functionalized nanoparticles (commercial, e.g.
- thiol-functionalized DNA (deprotected with TCEP or DTT and purified as described above) in a 10 mM - 50 m sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0 - pH 7.4).
- 4 M NaCl is added in small portions up to 0.15 M - 0.5 M (depending on the colloidal stability of particular nanoparticles).
- the reaction mixture is incubated for 0.5 - 24 hours.
- DNA-nanoparticle conjugates are purified by centrifuging and subsequent washing or by size-exclusion chromatography followed by dialysis.
- a 300 pm thick 100 mm double- side-polished silicon wafer is prepared having a 30 nm layer of SiN deposited by low pressure chemical vapor deposition (LPCVD) on each side of the wafer (e.g., from Virginia Semiconductor, Fredericksburg, VA, or Rogue Valley, OR).
- LPCVD low pressure chemical vapor deposition
- Negative e-beam resist is spun on each side and the resist on one side (the “front” side) of the wafer is then exposed in an e-beam lithography (EBE) instrument to pattern reaction wells over the SiN layer on that side.
- EBE e-beam lithography
- a 5 nm adhesion layer of chromium or titanium is deposited by e-beam evaporation onto the front side of the wafer, followed by e-beam deposition of a selected thickness of an opaque metal layer (e.g., 200 nm of Au or Al) onto the front side of the wafer.
- the wafer is then placed in a solution that removes the remaining exposed resist (a "lift off” step) from the front side, leaving reaction wells in the metal film layer that have diameters of 40 to 120 nm and well depths of 100 to 250, or other dimensions according to the preference of the user.
- the back (non-patterned) side of the wafer is then patterned via conventional photolithography with a positive tone resist to expose a square window aligned with the front EBL features. These features are etched with reactive ion etch (RIE) through the SiN layer of the back side of the wafer down to the Si layer.
- RIE reactive ion etch
- the wafer is then mounted in a holder with an O-ring that protects the metal-coated side from KOH solution and is then immersed in KOH solution, which preferentially etches down the (100) plane until the opposite SiN membrane is reached, resulting in a free-standing SiN + metal substrate with reaction wells on the front side of the wafer that are open down to the SiN layer.
- Throughholes are milled in the free-standing SiN layer of the substrate by exposing points or rastering over shapes in the substrate for a given dwell time and beam current relative to the thickness of the substrate, to target a desired final size and shape.
- Other tools capable of fabricating small throughholes include TEMs and other varieties of FIB (for example, gallium or gas field ion source (GFIS) neon).
- the throughholes may also be lithographically formed by overlaying a second EBL patterning step (as described in the above substrate preparation section) subsequent to creating the larger reaction well. Overlay of the second feature over the first feature yields a pattern consisting of the second feature (reaction well) concentrically aligned with the smaller first feature (throughhole).
- the resulting pattern may be used directly or, if the second feature is larger than a desired final size, it can be reduced with sub-nanometer precision by atomic layer deposition (ALD) of films such as HfO 2 , AI2O3, SiO 2 , TiO 2 , SiN, or Pt.
- ALD atomic layer deposition
- Doublestranded fluorescently labeled DNA was prepared by template-dependent polymerase- mediated extension of a 5 ’-bis-biotinylated primer.
- the 5 ’-bis-biotinylated primer contained two biotin groups attached to its 5 ’ end to enhance non-covalent binding to streptavidin.
- the structure of the bis-biotin moiety was the following, in which the 3’- phosphate is attached to the 5 ’-hydroxyl of the 5 ’-terminal nucleotide of the primer:
- the nucleotide sequence of the primer was: 5’-(bis-biotin)-GCTATGTGGCGCGGTATTAG-3’ (SEQ ID NO.: 4).
- the first 180 5 ’-nucleotides of the template corresponded to nucleotides 1980 to 2159 of the HBV genome.
- the last twenty 3’-terminal nucleotides (underlined) of the template were complementary to the primer sequence.
- the last five 3 ’-terminal nucleotides of the template were synthesized to contain phosphothioate internucleotide linkages to inhibit exonuclease degradation of the 3 ’-end of the template.
- Template-dependent primer extension was performed in the presence of ATP, GTP, Cy3b-dCTP, and Cy5-dUTP under the following conditions: 20 mM Tris-HCl, 10 mM (NH4)2SO4, 10 mM KC1, 4 mM MgSO4, 0.1% Triton®-X-100, pH 8.8 at 25 °C, 1 mM DTT, 1% Formamide (v/v), 10% glycerol (v/v), 0.1 mM dNTPs, 0.8 micromolar DNA template, and 2 micromolar primer.
- 20 mM Tris-HCl 10 mM (NH4)2SO4, 10 mM KC1, 4 mM MgSO4, 0.1% Triton®-X-100, pH 8.8 at 25 °C, 1 mM DTT, 1% Formamide (v/v), 10% glycerol (v/v), 0.1 mM dNTPs, 0.8 micromolar DNA template, and 2 micromolar primer.
- the predicted sequence of the fluorescently labeled portion of the primer extension product which corresponded to the complementary sequence of the first 180 5’- nucleotides of SEQ ID NO.: 5 (disregarding the first 5’-terminal 20 nucleotides, which were from the unlabeled primer), was: 5’-GUACGAGAUCUUCUAGAUACCGCCUCAGCUCUGUAUCGGGAAGCCUUAGA GUCUCCUGAGCAUUGUUCACCUCACCAUACUGCACUCAGGCAAGCAAUUC UUUGCUGGGGGGAACUAAUGACUCUAGCUACCUGGGUGGGUGUGUUAAUUUG GAAGAUCCAGCGUCUAGACCUAGUAGUC-3’ (SEQ ID NO.: 6).
- DNA-nanoparticle conjugates were further purified by (1) centrifugation, (2) subsequent centrifugal washing with 10 m PBS buffer pH 7.4 containing 0.05% (v/v) Tween- 20, and (3) re-suspension in the same washing buffer.
- the DNA-conjugated nanoparticles were stored at 4 °C.
- a solid state substrate comprising a cis side and a trans side was prepared using the techniques described above.
- the solid state substrate comprised a 4 x 4 square array of reaction wells having radially symmetric side walls with an internal diameter of ⁇ 40 nm, and a well depth of about 315 nm.
- the side walls of the reaction wells were formed by ion bombardment of a membrane defined within the substrate, the membrane comprising, from the trans side to the cis side, planar layers of (1) aluminum (250 nm), (2) titanium (15 nm), and (3) SiN (30 nm).
- the trans and cis sides of the membrane, and the inner side walls of the reaction well were coated with a 10 nm thick coating of Si CL that was added by atomic layer deposition.
- the internal diameters of the proximal throughhole, the reaction volume surrounded by the radially symmetrical side wall, and the distal opening of each reaction well were approximately the same.
- the reaction wells were separated from each other by a pitch of 1500 nm in the x and y directions.
- the solid state substrate was assembled in a sequencing cartridge such that the cis and trans sides of the substrate were fluidically accessible.
- the solid state substrate in the sequencing cartridge was positioned as shown schematically for substrate 202 in Figure 2, so that the distal openings of the reaction wells on the trans side of the solid state substrate were in the focus of the excitation laser beam that passed through microscope objective 222.
- the fluidic chamber close to the objective is referred to as trans chamber, and the distal chamber is referred to as the cis chamber.
- Each chamber was filled with a reaction buffer containing 20 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, lOmM MgCh, and then 25 pmole of DNA-conjugated carrier particles in the same buffer were added to the cis chamber (final concentration 100 pM nanoparticles with ⁇ 7 DNA strands/nanoparticle).
- the chambers were electrically connected via two electrodes (Ag/AgCh electrodes). These electrodes were used to apply a cis-to-trans 300 mV voltage bias across the substrate to electrophoretically transport the DNA-conjugated nanoparticles to the nanopore reaction wells, so that negatively charged fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands (hybridized to the complementary template strand in a dsDNA complex) attached to the carrier particles were electrophoretically drawn through the proximal throughholes and into the reaction volumes of the reaction wells.
- Plugging of the proximal throughholes with carrier particles was monitored by measuring the cis-to-trans current from a starting (open, unplugged) current of approximately 1000 nAmp to a current below about 200 nAmp when the rate of change of the current had plateaued. Plugging of all 16 wells was complete in about 30 seconds. Because the diameters of the carrier particles were greater than the diameters of the reaction wells, the carrier particles were prevented from passing through the reaction wells from the cis side of the substrate to the trans side. In addition, because the carrier particles were sparsely loaded with fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands, no more than one fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand was loaded into each reaction well.
- the trans chamber buffer was replaced with the following exonuclease reaction buffer: 20 mM Tris- HCl pH 7.5, 10 mM MgCh, 50% to 70% (v/v) glycerol, and 20 nM E. coli exonuclease III.
- binding conjugates of the invention comprise protein display systems.
- a peptide or protein display system are: 1) Tight linkage between an expressed protein and its encoding nucleic acid; and 2) Expression of the protein in a format that allows it to be assayed and separated based on some biochemical activity (for example, binding affinity, susceptibility to enzymatic action, or the like).
- Protein display systems can be separated into two groups based on the number of displayed proteins per display unit, that is, they are either polyvalent or monovalent.
- the polyvalent display systems such as yeast display, mammalian display systems and bacterial display systems express the gene(s) of interest (often diverse antibody libraries) as proteins tethered to the cell surface by means of a membrane anchor, similar to a native surface immunoglobulin found on the plasma membrane of normal B-cells.
- DNA encoding the library clones is transformed into the cell type of interest such that each cell receives at most one clone from the library.
- the resultant population of cells will each express tens to tens of thousands of copies of a single protein clone on their cell surfaces.
- FACS fluorescence-activated cell sorter
- regulation of Fab expression is adjusted so that the fraction of phage expressing a Fab is in the range of from about .002 to .001, or in the range of about .001 to .0005.
- the monovalent phage and viral systems, along with the ribosome display systems express an average of ⁇ 1 molecule of the displayed molecule per display unit. These systems yield accurate measurements of the true affinity of the binding site in question for each clone in the library. Generally these systems are used to display large, diverse libraries of binding elements. Small subpopulations of clones are then selected from these libraries based on their increased ability to bind the target antigen relative to other members of the library. After selection (often multiple rounds of selection) the resultant clones are isolated and characterized (e.g. as disclosed in U.S. patent 7,662,557 which is incorporated herein by reference).
- Further protein display systems for use with the invention include baculoviral display systems, adenoviral display systems, lentivirus display systems, retroviral display systems, SplitCore display systems, as disclosed in the following references: Sakihama et al, PLosOne 3(12): e4024 (2008); Makela et al, Combinatorial Chemistry & High Throughput Screening, 11: 86-98 (2008); Urano et al, Biochem. Biophys.
- the invention employs conventional phage display systems for improving one or more properties of an antibody /protein binding compound, particularly a preexisting antibody /protein binding compound.
- Factors affecting such binding reactions include: the number of phage to include in the reaction, the stringency of the reaction mixture; the number of target molecules to include in the reaction; presence or absence of blocking agents, such as, bovine serum albumin, gelatin, casein, or the like, to reduce nonspecific binding; the length and stringency of a wash step to deplete poor binders and enrich good binders; the nature of an elution step to remove binders from the target molecules; the format of target molecules used in the reaction, which, for example, may be bound to a solid support or derivatized with a capture agent, e.g.
- target molecules such as proteins
- a solid support such as a bead or microtiter plate. This enables the physical separation of bound and unbound phage simply by washing the support.
- Numerous supports are available for this purpose, including modified affinity resins, glass beads, modified magnetic beads, plastic supports, and the like. Useful supports are those that have low background for nonspecific phage binding and that present the target molecules in a native configuration and at a desirable concentration.
- a nucleic acid-encoded binding compound is an antibody fragment (or antibody binding compound) expressed by a phage.
- phage is a filamentous bacteriophage and the antibody fragment is expressed as part of a coat protein.
- phage may be a member of the Ff class of bacteriophages.
- the host of such filamentous bacteriophage is E. coli.
- a phagemid-helper phage system is used for displaying antibody fragments. Phagemids may be maintained as plasmids in a host bacteria and phage production induced by further infection with a helper phage.
- Exemplary phagemids include pComb3 and its related family members, e.g. disclosed in Barbas et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 88: 7978-7982 (1991), and pHENl and its related family members, e.g. disclosed in Hoogenboom et al, Nucleic Acids Research, 19: 4133- 4137 (1991); and U.S. patent 5,969,108; 6,806,079; 7,662,557; and related patents, which are incorporated herein by reference.
- an antibody fragment is expressed as a fusion protein with phage coat protein g3p.
- Antibody or “immunoglobulin” means a protein, either natural or synthetically produced by recombinant or chemical means, that structurally is a member of immunoglobulin superfamily (although it may not be of natural origin) and that is capable of specifically binding to a particular antigen or antigenic determinant, which may be a target molecule as the term is used herein.
- Antibodies e.g. IgG antibodies, are usually heterotetrameric glycoproteins of about 150,000 daltons, composed of two identical light (L) chains and two identical heavy (H) chains, as illustrated in Fig. 3.
- Each light chain is linked to a heavy chain by one covalent disulfide bond, while the number of disulfide linkages varies between the heavy chains of different immunoglobulin isotypes.
- Each heavy and light chain also has regularly spaced intra-chain disulfide bridges.
- Each heavy chain has at one end a variable domain (Vn) followed by a number of constant domains.
- Each light chain has a variable domain at one end (VL) and a. constant domain at its other end; the constant domain of the light chain is aligned with the first constant domain of the heavy chain, and the light chain variable domain is aligned with the variable domain of the heavy chain, as illustrated in Fig. 3.
- the binding characteristics e.g.
- immunoglobulins can be assigned to different classes. There are five major classes of immunoglobulins: IgA, IgD, IgE, IgG, and IgM, and several of these can be further divided into subclasses (isotypes), e.g., IgG,, IgG2, IgG , IgG4, IgAi, and IgA 2 .
- Antibody fragment and all grammatical variants thereof, (or its equivalent, “antibody binding compound”) as used herein are defined as a portion of an intact antibody comprising the antigen binding site or variable region of the intact antibody, wherein the portion is free of the constant heavy chain domains (i.e. CH2, CH3, and CH4, depending on antibody isotype) of the Fc region of the intact antibody.
- constant heavy chain domains i.e. CH2, CH3, and CH4, depending on antibody isotype
- antibody fragments include Fab, Fab', Fab'-SH, F(ab') 2 , and Fv fragments; diabodies; any antibody fragment that is a polypeptide having a primary structure consisting of one uninterrupted sequence of contiguous amino acid residues (referred to herein as a “singlechain antibody fragment” or “single chain polypeptide”), including without limitation (1) single-chain Fv (scFv) molecules (2) single chain polypeptides containing only one light chain variable domain, or a fragment thereof that contains the three CDRs of the light chain variable domain, without an associated heavy chain moiety and (3) single chain polypeptides containing only one heavy chain variable region, or a fragment thereof containing the three CDRs of the heavy chain variable region, without an associated light chain moiety; and multispecific or multivalent structures formed from antibody fragments.
- single-chain Fv single-chain Fv
- mAb monoclonal antibody
- monoclonal antibody refers to an antibody obtained from a population of substantially homogeneous antibodies, i.e., the individual antibodies comprising the population are identical except for possible naturally occurring mutations that may be present in minor amounts. Monoclonal antibodies are highly specific, being directed against a single antigenic site. Furthermore, in contrast to conventional (polyclonal) antibody preparations which typically include different antibodies directed against different determinants (epitopes), each mAb is directed against a single determinant on the antigen.
- Binding compound means a compound that is capable of specifically binding to a particular target molecule or group of target molecules.
- binding compounds include antibodies, receptors, transcription factors, signaling molecules, viral proteins, lectins, nucleic acids, aptamers, and the like, e.g. Sharon and Eis, Lectins, 2 nd Edition (Springer, 2006); Klussmann, The Aptamer Handbook: Functional Oligonucleotides and Their Applications (John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2006).
- binding compounds are proteins, such as antibodies or fragments thereof, receptors, signaling proteins, or the like.
- Mutants of protein binding compounds are protein binding compounds that differ from a reference binding compound by one or more amino acid substitutions; in one aspect, each binding compound mutant differs from a reference binding compound by from 1 to 3 amino acid substitutions; and in a further aspect, each binding compound mutant differs from a reference binding compound by one amino acid substitution.
- antibody-based binding compound or equivalently “antibody binding compound” means a binding compound derived from an antibody, such as an antibody fragment, including but not limited to, Fab, Fab', F(ab')2, and Fv fragments, or recombinant forms thereof.
- an antibody-based binding compound comprises a scaffold or framework region of an antibody and CDR regions of an antibody.
- the binding characteristics of an antibody binding compound e.g. affinity, specificity, etc.
- such framework and CDR regions may be expression in various formats, that is, various antibody fragment types and various isotypes.
- CDR complementarity-determining region
- “Complex” as used herein means an assemblage or aggregate of molecules in direct or indirect contact with one another.
- “contact,” or more particularly, “direct contact” in reference to a complex of molecules, or in reference to specificity or specific binding means two or more molecules are close enough so that attractive noncovalent interactions, such as Van der Waal forces, hydrogen bonding, ionic and hydrophobic interactions, and the like, dominate the interaction of the molecules.
- a complex of molecules is stable in that under assay conditions, the presence of the complex is thermodynamically favorable.
- complex may refer to a stable aggregate of two or more proteins, which is equivalently referred to as a “proteinprotein complex.”
- a complex may also refer to an antibody bound to its corresponding antigen.
- Complexes of particular interest in the invention are protein-protein complexes and antibody-antigen complexes.
- various types of noncovalent interactions may contribute to antibody binding of antigen, including electrostatic forces, hydrogen bonds, van der Waals forces, and hydrophobic interactions. The relative importance of each of these depends on the structures of the binding site of the individual antibody and of the antigenic determinant. The strength of the binding between a single combining site of an antibody and an epitope of an antigen, which can be determined experimentally by equilibrium dialysis (e.g.
- Kd dissociation constant
- concentration of antigen that is required to occupy the combining sites of half the antibody molecules present in a solution of antibody.
- a smaller Kd indicates a stronger or higher affinity interaction, because a lower concentration of antigen is needed to occupy the sites.
- the Kd usually varies from about 10’ 7 M to 10’ 11 M. Serum from an immunized individual will contain a mixture of antibodies with different affinities for the antigen, depending primarily on the amino acid sequences of the CDRs.
- Nucleic acid encompasses polynucleotides and oligonucleotides as defined below, which may be natural or artificial, of any length, single-stranded, double-stranded, triple-stranded, linear, circular, or branched, and which are exemplified by 2’ -deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), ribonucleic acid (RNA) (such as ribosomal RNAs, transfer RNAs, microRNAs,), DNA/RNA hybrids, and DNA-RNA chimeras.
- DNA deoxyribonucleic acid
- RNA ribonucleic acid
- DNA/RNA hybrids DNA/RNA hybrids
- Nucleic acids usually contain one or more standard nucleotide bases, such as adenine, cytosine, guanine, thymine, and uracil, and analogs thereof, such that the bases are usually capable of basepairing with a base in an opposite base in a double strand form with complementary bases in a complementary strand.
- nucleotide bases such as adenine, cytosine, guanine, thymine, and uracil, and analogs thereof, such that the bases are usually capable of basepairing with a base in an opposite base in a double strand form with complementary bases in a complementary strand.
- “Phage display” is a technique by which variant polypeptides are displayed as fusion proteins to at least a portion of a coat protein on the surface of phage, e.g., filamentous phage, particles.
- a utility of phage display lies in the fact that large libraries of randomized protein variants can be rapidly and efficiently selected for those sequences that bind to a target molecule with high affinity. Display of peptide and protein libraries on phage has been used for screening millions of polypeptides for ones with specific binding properties. Polyvalent phage display methods have been used for displaying small random peptides and small proteins through fusions to either gene III or gene VIII of filamentous phage. Wells and Lowman, Curr. Opin. Struct.
- phagemid vectors are used, which simplify DNA manipulations. Lowman and Wells, Methods: A companion to Methods in Enzymology, 3:205-0216 (1991).
- “Phagemid” means a plasmid vector having a bacterial origin of replication, e.g., ColEl, and a copy of an intergenic region of a bacteriophage.
- the phagemid may be used on any known bacteriophage, including filamentous bacteriophage and lambdoid bacteriophage.
- the plasmid will also generally contain a selectable marker for antibiotic resistance. Segments of DNA cloned into these vectors can be propagated as plasmids. When cells harboring these vectors are provided with all genes necessary for the production of phage particles, the mode of replication of the plasmid changes to rolling circle replication to generate copies of one strand of the plasmid DNA and package phage particles.
- the phagemid may form infectious or non-infectious phage particles.
- This term includes phagemids, which contain a phage coat protein gene or fragment thereof linked to a heterologous polypeptide gene as a gene fusion such that the heterologous polypeptide is displayed on the surface of the phage particle.
- “Phage” or “phage vector” means a double stranded replicative form of a bacteriophage containing a heterologous gene and capable of replication.
- the phage vector has a phage origin of replication allowing phage replication and phage particle formation.
- the phage is preferably a filamentous bacteriophage, such as an Ml 3, fl, fd, Pf3 phage or a derivative thereof, or a lambdoid phage, such as lambda, 21, phi80, phi81, 82, 424, 434, etc., or a derivative thereof. .
- Polynucleotide and “oligonucleotide” are used interchangeably and mean a linear polymer of nucleotide monomers or analogs thereof.
- Nucleotide monomers in polynucleotides and oligonucleotides are capable of specifically binding to a natural polynucleotide by way of a regular pattern of monomer-to-monomer interactions, such as Watson-Crick type of base pairing, base stacking, Hoogsteen or reverse Hoogsteen types of base pairing, or the like.
- Such monomers and their internucleosidic linkages may be naturally occurring or may be analogs thereof, e.g. naturally occurring or non-naturally occurring analogs.
- Non-naturally occurring analogs may include PNAs, phosphorothioate internucleosidic linkages, bases containing linking groups permitting the attachment of labels, such as fluorophores, or haptens, and the like.
- PNAs phosphorothioate internucleosidic linkages
- bases containing linking groups permitting the attachment of labels such as fluorophores, or haptens, and the like.
- Polynucleotides typically range in size from a few monomeric units, e.g. 5-40, when they are usually referred to as “oligonucleotides,” to several thousand monomeric units.
- oligonucleotides typically range in size from a few monomeric units, e.g. 5-40, when they are usually referred to as “oligonucleotides,” to several thousand monomeric units.
- ATGCCTG a sequence of letters (upper or lower case)
- A denotes deoxyadenosine
- C denotes deoxycytidine
- G denotes deoxyguanosine
- T denotes thymidine
- I denotes deoxyinosine
- U denotes uridine, unless otherwise indicated or obvious from context.
- polynucleotides comprise the four natural nucleosides (e.g. deoxyadenosine, deoxycytidine, deoxyguanosine, deoxythymidine for DNA or their ribose counterparts for RNA) linked by phosphodiester linkages; however, they may also comprise non-natural nucleotide analogs, e.g. including modified bases, sugars, or intemucleosidic linkages.
- nucleosides e.g. deoxyadenosine, deoxycytidine, deoxyguanosine, deoxythymidine for DNA or their ribose counterparts for RNA
- non-natural nucleotide analogs e.g. including modified bases, sugars, or intemucleosidic linkages.
- oligonucleotide or polynucleotide substrate requirements for activity e.g. single stranded DNA, RNA/DNA duplex, or the like
- selection of appropriate composition for the oligonucleotide or polynucleotide substrates is within the knowledge of one of ordinary skill, especially with guidance from treatises, such as Sambrook et al, Molecular Cloning, Second Edition (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, New York, 1989), and like references.
- the oligonucleotide and polynucleotide may refer to either a single stranded form or a double stranded form (i.e. duplexes of an oligonucleotide or polynucleotide and its respective complement). It will be clear to one of ordinary skill which form or whether both forms are intended from the context of usage.
- Primer means an oligonucleotide, either natural or synthetic, that is capable, upon forming a duplex with a polynucleotide template, of acting as a point of initiation of nucleic acid synthesis and being extended from its 3' end along the template so that an extended duplex is formed.
- Extension of a primer is usually carried out with a nucleic acid polymerase, such as a DNA or RNA polymerase.
- the sequence of nucleotides added in the extension process is determined by the sequence of the template polynucleotide.
- primers are extended by a DNA polymerase.
- Primers usually have a length in the range of from 14 to 40 nucleotides, or in the range of from 18 to 36 nucleotides. However, much longer primers may be also used. Primers are employed in a variety of nucleic amplification reactions, for example, linear amplification reactions using a single primer, or in polymerase chain reactions, employing two or more primers. Guidance for selecting the lengths and sequences of primers for particular applications is known to those of ordinary skill in the art, as evidenced for example by Dieffenbach, editor, PCR Primer: A Laboratory Manual, 2nd Edition (Cold Spring Harbor Press, New York, 2003).
- Readout means a characteristic or physical property of one or more signal generation moieties, or labels, that are measured, detected, and/or counted and that can be converted to a number or value.
- a readout of an assay is obtained by the use or application of a instrument and/or process that converts assay results on the molecular level into signals that may be detected and recorded.
- Such instrument or process may be referred to as a “readout device” (or instrument) or “readout process” (or method).
- a readout can also include, or refer to, an actual numerical representation of such collected or recorded data.
- a readout of a nanopore sequencing method may be a fluorescent signal from a labeled nucleotide.
- Sequence determination when referring to polynucleotides, includes the determination of partial or full nucleotide sequence information of one or more polynucleotides. These terms also include determining sequences of subsets of the full set of four natural nucleotides, A, C, G and T for DNA (or A, C, G or U for RNA), such as, for example, a sequence of only A's and C's of a target polynucleotide.
- sequence determination may be accomplished by identifying the order and locations of a single type of nucleotide, e.g. cytosines, within the target polynucleotide "catcgc . . . " so that its sequence is represented as a binary code, e.g. "100101 . . .
- these terms may also include subsequences of a target polynucleotide that serve as a fingerprint for the target polynucleotide; that is, subsequences that uniquely identify a target polynucleotide, or a class of target polynucleotides, within a set of polynucleotides, e.g. all different RNA sequences expressed by a cell.
- “Specific” or “specificity” in reference to the binding of one molecule to another molecule, such as a labeled target sequence for a probe, means the recognition, contact, and formation of a stable complex between the two molecules, together with substantially less recognition, contact, or complex formation of that molecule with other molecules.
- “specific” in reference to the binding of a first molecule to a second molecule means that to the extent the first molecule recognizes and forms a complex with another molecule in a reaction or sample, it forms the largest number of the complexes with the second molecule. Preferably, this largest number is at least fifty percent.
- molecules involved in a specific binding event have areas on their surfaces or in cavities giving rise to specific recognition between the molecules binding to each other.
- specific binding examples include antibody-antigen interactions, enzymesubstrate interactions, formation of duplexes or triplexes among polynucleotides and/or oligonucleotides, receptor-ligand interactions, and the like.
- contact in reference to specificity or specific binding means two molecules are close enough that weak noncovalent chemical interactions, such as Van der Waal forces, hydrogen bonding, base-stacking interactions, ionic and hydrophobic interactions, and the like, dominate the interaction of the molecules.
- Target polynucleotide means a polynucleotide, or a segment of a polynucleotide, whose sequence is to be determined. If a target polynucleotide is doublestranded, then determination of a sequence of one strand of the target polynucleotide will reveal the sequence of the corresponding complementary strand, based on Watson and Crick base-pairing rules.
- a target polynucleotide is single- stranded (or is intended to refer to a single strand in a double stranded nucleic acid)
- determining a sequence of a strand that is complementary to the target polynucleotide e.g., the sequence of a cDNA prepared by reverse transcription of a target RNA polynucleotide
- a target polynucleotide may be considered to be the a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand whose sequence is determined directly from a sequence of mononucleotides released serially by exonuclease-mediated digestion, or a target polynucleotide may be considered to be a polynucleotide strand whose sequence is complementary to a sequence of the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand.
- sample means a quantity of material from a biological, environmental, medical, or patient source in which detection or measurement of target biomolecule, such as a target nucleic acids, is sought.
- sample On the one hand it is meant to include a specimen or culture (e.g., microbiological cultures).
- a sample may include a specimen of synthetic origin.
- Biological samples may be animal, including human, fluid, solid (e.g., stool) or tissue, such as, fluids from nasal or other schwabs, as well as liquid and solid food and feed products and ingredients such as dairy items, vegetables, meat and meat by-products, and waste.
- Biological samples may include materials taken from a patient including, but not limited to cultures, blood, saliva, tears, sweat, urine, cerebral spinal fluid, pleural fluid, milk, lymph, sputum, semen, needle aspirates, and the like.
- Environmental samples include environmental material such as surface matter, soil, water and industrial samples, as well as samples obtained from food and dairy processing instruments, apparatus, equipment, utensils, disposable and nondisposable items. These examples are not to be construed as limiting the sample types applicable to the present invention.
- Wild type or “reference” or “pre-existing” in reference to a binding compound are used synonymously to mean a compound which is being analyzed or improved in accordance with the method of the invention. That is, such a compound serves as a starting material from which variant polypeptides are derived through the introduction of mutations.
- a “wild type” sequence for a given protein is usually the sequence that is most common in nature, but the term is used more broadly here to include compounds that have been engineered.
- a wild type” gene sequence is typically the sequence for that gene which is most commonly found in nature, but the usage here includes genes that may have been engineered from a natural compound, e.g.
- Mutations may be introduced into a “wild type” gene (and thus the protein it encodes) through any available process, e.g. site-specific mutation, insertion of chemically synthesized segments, or other conventional means.
- the products of such processes are “variant” or “mutant” forms of the original “wild type” protein or gene.
- Exemplary reference (or wild type or preexisting) sequences include antibody-targeted drugs or antibody-based drugs such as adalimumab (Humira), bevacizumab (Avastin), cetuximab (Erbitux), efalizumab (Raptiva), infliximab (Remicade), panitumumab (Vectubix), ranibuzumab (Lucentis), rituximab (Rituxan), trastuzumab (Herceptin), and the like.
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
- Pathology (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Biochemistry (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Food Science & Technology (AREA)
- Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
- Hematology (AREA)
- Biophysics (AREA)
- Nanotechnology (AREA)
- Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- Measuring Or Testing Involving Enzymes Or Micro-Organisms (AREA)
Abstract
The invention is directed to methods for detecting and/or quantifying the binding of predetermined binding conjugates to one or more target molecules of interest. Binding conjugates comprising a binding compound or moiety and an identifying polynucleotide are combined with one or more target molecules under stringent binding conditions, after which binder are eluted, identifying polynucleotides are release and analyzed by a novel optical nanopore single molecule sequencing method.
Description
TITLE
MULTIPLEX BINDING ASSAYS WITH OPTICAL NANOPORE READOUT
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application Number 63/260,343 filed August 17, 2021, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
INTRODUCTION
[0002] High throughput DNA sequencing of DNA labels has been used as a readout for a wide variety of protein-based assays because of accuracies provided by large scale counting of polynucleotide or oligonucleotide labels (sometime referred to as “barcodes” or “tags”), e.g. Liszczak et al, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 58(13): 4144-4162 (2019); DuBridge, U.S. patent publication 2012/0077691; Faham et al, U.S. patent 8236503; and the like. For example, enzyme-linked immunosorbent assays (ELISAs) have been extremely successful for identifying proteins of interest in part because two different antibodies are required to bind to two different epitopes on the target in order to generate a signal or readout by enzymatic conversion of a specialized substrate. Multiplex analogs of ELISA that employ DNA barcodes have been developed that produce, either directly or indirectly, multiple signals to indicate the presence or quantity of multiple target molecules. An exemplary direct DNA barcode signal is described by Akeson et al, U.S. patent 7060507, where polymers of various lengths and nanopore translocation speeds are used to generate electronic signatures to identify different binding compounds. Exemplary indirect DNA barcode signals are described by Buggenum et al, Scientific Reports, 6: 22675 (2016); Nam et al, Science, 301: 1884-1886 (2003); Buggenum et al, Nature Comm., 9: 2384 (2018), and like references, where different forms of multiplex immuno- PCR are implemented with various readouts, including large-scale DNA sequencing, to identify and/or count barcodes associated with binding events.
[0003] High throughput sequencing has also been used as a readout in the field of therapeutic antibody development where, instead of barcodes, coding sequences are analyzed to identify proteins that display favorable binding properties, such as, higher affinity to a target molecule than a reference binding compound or lower or higher crossreactivity with non-target molecules of interest, e.g. DuBridge, U.S. patent publications 2012/0258866 and 2012/0077691; and U.S. patent 10526597.
[0004] Unfortunately, current direct and indirect methods of identifying and counting DNA barcodes or coding sequences in multiplex measurements suffer from either requiring an accurate and conveniently implemented single molecule sequencing method or one or more amplification steps. Until recently the former has not been available and the latter adds a step that adds a source of readout variability and requires statistical analysis of large numbers of sequence reads, and the possible use of internal standards, for reliable measurements.
[0005] Multiplex binding assays relying on DNA barcodes or coding sequences would be advanced if a convenient and accurate single molecule sequencing technique was available for identifying and counting DNA sequences associated with binding events.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0006] The invention is directed to methods for detecting the presence or quantity of one or more binding pairs formed between target analytes and binding conjugates in a sample by tabulating oligonucleotide sequences of binding conjugates, wherein such oligonucleotide sequences are determined using an optically based nanopore sequencing method. In one aspect, a plurality of binding conjugates each comprising a binding compound specific for an analyte and an oligonucleotide barcode. In some embodiments, the method comprises the steps of: (a) combining in a reaction mixture a sample and at least one binding conjugate under conditions that permit at least one binding conjugate to specifically bind to a target analyte, wherein each binding conjugate comprises: (A) a binding compound specific for a target analyte, and (B) an oligonucleotide barcode linked to the binding compound, wherein the oligonucleotide barcode has a nucleotide sequence which identifies the target analyte and whose nucleotides are labeled, or capable of being labeled, by distinguishable fluorescent dyes; (b) separating unbound binding conjugates from binding conjugates specifically bound to target analytes; (c) releasing the oligonucleotide barcodes from the bound binding conjugates; and (d) identifying the presence or quantity of the one or more target analytes by sequencing the oligonucleotide barcodes with the following steps:
(i) translocating through one or more nanopores the labeled oligonucleotide barcodes, wherein each nanopore comprises a passage through an insulative layer and an opaque layer, the passage through the opaque layer having a diameter;
(ii) illuminating the passage from the direction of the opaque layer with a light beam having a wavelength greater than the diameter of the passage through the opaque
layer, so that an excitation zone of non-propagating light is created within the passage through the opaque layer;
(hi) digesting the labeled oligonucleotide barcodes in the passage outside of the excitation zone to release labeled nucleotides one at a time at a rate less than the expected time of diffusion of the released labeled nucleotides out of the passage; and
(iv) identifying each released labeled nucleotide by detecting the signal generated by its label as the released labeled nucleotide diffuses out of the passage through the excitation zone, thereby identifying binding conjugates bound to target analytes.
[0007] In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide barcode of a binding conjugate is attached to a carrier particle, which facilitates nanopore-based sequence identification. [0008] In another aspect, the invention includes a method for identifying binding conjugates that bind to predetermined target analytes with an affinity equal to or greater than a predetermined value. In some embodiments, such predetermined affinity value is determined by a reference compound, such as a pre-existing antibody binding compound. In other embodiments, the invention includes a method for identifying binding conjugates that bind to predetermined target analytes with an affinity equal to or greater than a predetermined reference compound and that have reduced cross-reactivity (i.e. affinity) to another predetermined compound. In still other embodiments, the invention includes a method for identifying binding conjugates that bind to predetermined target analytes with an affinity equal to or greater than a predetermined reference compound and that have increased cross-reactivity (i.e. affinity) to another predetermined compound.
[0009] In another aspect, the invention is directed to methods of detecting the presence or quantity of one or more target molecules in a sample comprising the steps of: (a) combining in a reaction mixture a sample and at least one binding conjugate under conditions that permit at least one binding conjugate to specifically bind to a target molecule, wherein each binding conjugate comprises: (A) a binding compound specific for a target molecule, and (B) an oligonucleotide barcode linked to the binding compound, wherein the oligonucleotide barcode has a nucleotide sequence which identifies the target molecule and whose nucleotides are labeled, or capable of being labeled, by distinguishable fluorescent dyes; (b) separating unbound binding conjugates from binding conjugates specifically bound to target molecules; (c) releasing the oligonucleotide barcodes from the bound binding conjugates; and (d) identifying the presence or quantity of the one or more target molecules by sequencing the oligonucleotide barcodes with the following steps:
(i) translocating through one or more nanopores the labeled oligonucleotide barcodes, wherein each nanopore comprises a passage through an insulative layer and an opaque layer, the passage through the opaque layer having a diameter;
(ii) illuminating the passage from the direction of the opaque layer with a light beam having a wavelength greater than the diameter of the passage through the opaque layer, so that an excitation zone of non-propagating light is created within the passage through the opaque layer;
(iii) digesting the labeled oligonucleotide barcodes in the passage outside of the excitation zone to release labeled nucleotides one at a time at a rate less than the expected time of diffusion of the released labeled nucleotides out of the passage;
(iv) identifying each released labeled nucleotide by detecting the signal generated by its label as the released labeled nucleotide diffuses out of the passage through the excitation zone; thereby identifying binding conjugates bound to target analytes.
[0010] In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide barcode of a binding conjugate is attached to a carrier particle. In some embodiments, the one or more target molecules are a plurality of target molecules. In some embodiments, the plurality of target molecules is in the range of from 2 to 500 target molecules. In some embodiments, the plurality of target molecules is in the range of from 2 to 50 target molecules and the binding compounds are antibody binding compounds
[0011] The present invention also provides kits for use in methods of the invention.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0012] Figures 1A-1B illustrates the steps of exemplary embodiment of the method of the invention.
[0013] Figure 1C illustrates one embodiment of a binding conjugate.
[0014] Figure ID illustrates another embodiment of a binding conjugate.
[0015] Figure IE illustrates still another embodiment of a binding conjugate.
[0016] Figure 2A-2D illustrates an exemplary sequencing step for use in the method of the invention.
[0017] Figure 3 illustrates an exemplary apparatus for carrying out the sequencing (or barcode identification) step of the invention.
[0018] Figure 4 illustrates an embodiment for identifying high affinity binding compounds for a target molecule.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS
[0019] While the invention is amenable to various modifications and alternative forms, specifics thereof are shown by way of example in the drawings and are described in further detail herein. It should be understood, however, that the intention is not to limit the invention to the particular embodiments described herein. On the contrary, the intention is to cover all modifications, equivalents, and alternatives falling within the spirit and scope of the invention.
[0020] The invention is directed to methods for detecting binding of predetermined binding conjugates to one or more target molecules of interest. In some embodiments, methods of the invention comprise the steps: (a) combining in a reaction mixture a sample containing one or more target molecules and at least one predetermined binding conjugate under conditions that permit at least one predetermined binding conjugate to specifically bind to a target molecule, wherein each binding conjugate comprises: (A) a binding compound and (B) a polynucleotide linked to the binding compound, wherein the polynucleotide has a nucleotide sequence which identifies the binding compound and whose nucleotides are labeled, or capable of being labeled, by distinguishable fluorescent dyes; (b) separating unbound binding conjugates from binding conjugates specifically bound to target molecules; (c) releasing the polynucleotides from the bound binding conjugates; and (d) identifying the presence or quantity of the binding compounds by sequencing the released polynucleotides with the following steps:
(i) translocating through one or more nanopores the labeled oligonucleotide barcodes, wherein each nanopore comprises a passage through an insulative layer and an opaque layer, the passage through the opaque layer having a diameter;
(ii) illuminating the passage from the direction of the opaque layer with a light beam having a wavelength greater than the diameter of the passage through the opaque layer, so that an excitation zone of non-propagating light is created within the passage through the opaque layer;
(iii) digesting the labeled oligonucleotide barcodes in the passage outside of the excitation zone to release labeled nucleotides one at a time at a rate less than the expected time of diffusion of the released labeled nucleotides out of the passage; and
(iv) identifying each released labeled nucleotide by detecting the signal generated by its label as the released labeled nucleotide diffuses out of the passage through the excitation zone.
[0021] An exemplary embodiment of a multiplexed binding assay of the invention is illustrated in Figs. 1A-1B. Sample (100) containing target molecules of interest, e.g. proteins, 1, 2, 3 ... N, are combined (102) and incubated with one or more capture reagents (106), such as, antibodies, bound to surface (104) under conditions (108) that promote the formation of binding pairs; that is, stable complexes between capture reagents and the target molecules for which they are specific, after which non-binding compounds of sample (100) are removed, e.g. by washing. Surface (104) may be a surface of a planar support or a bead or microparticle. The distribution of capture reagents on surface (104) may be homogeneous in that the one or more capture reagents are present as a mixture in a uniform density or the distribution may be in non-overlapping patches containing single kind of capture reagent. Usually there is at least one capture reagent for each target molecule of interest. To surface (104) containing captured target molecules is added (110) binding conjugates (112) under conditions that promote the formation of stable complexes between binding compounds of the binding conjugates and their respective target molecules. After incubation for a predetermined time (115), surface (104) is washed under predetermined conditions to remove non-binding binding conjugates or binding conjugates that bind with an affinity less than a predetermined value. Binding conjugates (112) may have a variety of different formats, including (for example) the formats illustrated in Figs. 1C-1E and 4.
[0022] As illustrated in Fig. 1A and 1C, in some embodiments, binding conjugates (112) comprise a binding compound (132) (such as an antibody binding compound) releasably linked to carrier particle (130) (for example, through a photocleavable linkage (136)) and polynucleotide (134) linked to the same carrier particle (130). In Fig. 1A, the polynucleotides are shown as being labeled with a sequence of fluorescent dyes, f and g (e.g. attached to bases, as described below) to identify different binding compounds (and consequently the target molecules they are specific for). In Fig. 1C, polynucleotide (134) is illustrated as being labeled with a sequence of symbols (star, filled circle, open circle), for identifying its binding compound. Returning to Fig. IB, after incubation and washing, carrier particles with their polynucleotides are released (116) and their labels analyzed and counted (118) using the single molecule sequencing method described below, which is illustrate in part in Fig. 1C.
[0023] Briefly, in Fig. 1C, after binding conjugate (131) binds (138) to target molecule (140), linkages (136) to binding compounds (132) are cleaved (142), thereby releasing carrier particle (130) with labeled polynucleotide (134) attached. The released carrier
particle with labeled polynucleotide (144) is directly sequenced (143) by the method described below. Linkages, including cleavable linkages, between polynucleotides and binding compounds (such as, antibody binding compounds) are well-known in the art and are disclosed is the following exemplary references: Agasti et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 134: 18499-18502 (2012); Saran et al, Bioconjugate Chem., 18(1): 275-279 (2007); Dezfouli et al, Proteomics, 14: 2432-2436 (2014); Cremers et al, Bioconjugate Chem., 30: 2384-2392 (2019); Brofelth et al, Communications Biol., 3: 339 (2020); Kozlov et al, Biopolymers, 73: 621-630 (2004); Li et al, ChemBioChem, 20: 1599-1605 (2019); Maerle et al, PLOSOne, 14(1): e0209860 (2018); Ullal et al, chapter 4, Methods in Molecular Biology, vol. 1346 (Humana Press); and the like. Kits for making antibody-DNA conjugates are also commercially available, e.g. Solulink Conjugation System (Technical Manual, Cat. No. A-9202-001, version 12.12.2012), also described in U.S. patents 6,686,461;
6,800,728; 7,102,024; 7,173,125; and 7,462,689, which are hereby incorporated by reference. Photocleavable linkages are described in Urdea et al, U.S. patent 5367066; Agasti et al (cited above); and Saran et al (cited above), the latter U.S. patent being incorporated herein by reference. In some embodiments, the photocleavable linker disclosed by Agasti et al (cited above) is employed with the invention.
[0024] Binding conjugates with alternative formats are illustrated in Figs. ID and IE. In Fig. ID, binding compound (150) of binding conjugate (149) is attached through linker (152) to strand (153a) of double stranded DNA (154). Double stranded DNA (154) may include a barcode sequence (155), which may or may not be labeled. Other strand (153b) of double stranded DNA (154) is attached to carrier particle (156). After binding compound (150) binds to its target molecule and the resulting complex is washed, strands (153a and 153b) may be melted to release carrier particle (156). Strand (153b) may be pre-labeled and directly evaluated by the sequencing method described below, or strand (153b) may be labeled after melting, then evaluated. Alternatively, a separately labeled polynucleotide may be attached to carrier particle (156). In Fig. IE, binding conjugate (160) comprises binding compound (162) linked to polynucleotide (165) which has primer binding site (164) and barcode (166). After binding conjugate (160) binds to target molecule (167) and after washing, complementary oligonucleotide (168) on carrier particle (170) anneals to primer binding site (164) and is extended by a polymerase in the presence of labeled dNTPs. Carrier particle (170) with extended strand (172) is then dehybridized and analyzed by the sequencing method described below.
[0025] In another aspect, the invention is a method for identifying binding compounds that specifically binding to predetermined target molecules. In some embodiments, such specific binding may comprise binding to a predetermined target molecule with affinity greater than that of a reference compound, such as, a pre-existing therapeutic antibody. In some embodiments of this aspect, binding conjugates of the invention may be a protein display system, such as a phage display system as illustrated in Fig. 4. A phage display library (400) is created using conventional techniques, for example, to display binding compounds that comprise single chain antibody binding compounds, e.g. as taught by DuBridge U.S. patent 10526597, or like references. Each phage of the library comprises a capsid (404) containing DNA or RNA that is capable of encoding synthesis of display proteins (402); thus, the phages serve as binding conjugates of the invention. As above, phage display library (400) is combined in a reaction mixture (406) with target proteins (408) which may be (for example) a therapeutic target protein adsorbed on surface (410). After incubation under predetermined conditions (412), non-binding phage are washed away, after which binding phage are eluted, DNA is extracted and sequenced (414) as described below.
Nanopore Sequencing
[0026] The method of the invention includes a step of sequencing oligonucleotides, such as, oligonucleotide barcodes, using an optically based nanopore sequencing technique that is described in this section. Particular reaction well structures, particular labels, and fabrication examples are shown for purposes of illustration. It should be appreciated, however, that the disclosure is not intended to be limiting in this respect, as other structures, arrays of reaction wells, and other fabrication technologies that are not specifically detailed herein may be utilized to implement various aspects of the present sequencing method. Guidance for aspects of the sequencing method is found in many references and treatises known to those with ordinary skill in the art, including, for example, Cao, Nanostructures & Nanomaterials (Imperial College Press, 2004); Levinson, Principles of Lithography, Second Edition (SPIE Press, 2005); Doering and Nishi, Editors, Handbook of Semiconductor Manufacturing Technology, Second Edition (CRC Press, 2007); Sawyer et al, Electrochemistry for Chemists, 2nd edition (Wiley Interscience, 1995); Bard and Faulkner, Electrochemical Methods: Fundamentals and Applications, 2nd edition (Wiley, 2000); Lakowicz, Principles of Fluorescence Spectroscopy, 3rd edition (Springer,
2006); Hermanson, Bioconjugate Techniques, Second Edition (Academic Press, 2008); and the like, which relevant parts are hereby incorporated by reference.
[0027] In some embodiments, the step for identifying a nucleotide sequence of a barcode comprises providing a solid state substrate comprising a cis side and a trans side, the substrate comprising a reaction well that defines a reaction volume and comprises (i) a proximal throughhole extending between the cis side and the trans side of the substrate, (ii) one or more side walls, and (iii) a distal opening. The solid state substrate further comprises an opaque metal layer that substantially blocks excitation light from penetrating into the reaction volume and from penetrating to the cis side of the substrate. Also provided is a carrier particle comprising a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand that is attached to the carrier particle. The fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises (i) a proximal end that is attached to the carrier particle, (ii) a distal end that is cleavable by an exonuclease, and (iii) at least one fluorescently labeled nucleotide comprising a fluorescent label. The carrier particle is located on the cis side of the substrate, but does not pass through the throughhole, such that the attached fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand protrudes through the throughhole so that the distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand is in the reaction volume. The trans side of the substrate is illuminated with excitation light to create a fluorescence excitation zone adjacent to the distal opening of the reaction well. While the substrate is illuminated, the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is reacted with an exonuclease so that mononucleotides are released serially from the distal end of the strand and diffuse through the fluorescence excitation zone, so that fluorescently labeled mononucleotides in the excitation zone emit fluorescent signals. The fluorescent signals are detected as a function of time, whereby a nucleotide sequence is determined from the time order of fluorescent signals detected from the released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides.
[0028] In some embodiments, the distal opening of the reaction well has a minimum diameter of at least 30 nm. In some embodiments, the distal opening of the reaction well has a minimum diameter of 50 nm to 150 nm. In some embodiments, the one or more walls of the reaction well are not tapered. In some embodiments, the one or more walls of the reaction well are substantially cylindrical. In some embodiments, the opaque metal layer comprises gold or aluminum. In some embodiments, the opaque metal layer has a thickness of 100 nm to 600 nm. In some embodiments, the solid state substrate comprises a plurality of opaque metal layers. In some embodiments, the reaction well has a well depth of at least 200 nm. In some embodiments, the reaction well has a well depth of 200
nm to 1000 nm. In some embodiments, the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand in the reaction volume comprises a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide segment containing at least 100 contiguous nucleotides. In some embodiments, the throughhole has a minimum diameter of at least 2 nm. In some embodiments, the throughhole has a minimum diameter of 2 nm to 50 nm. In some embodiments, the substrate comprises a thin membrane layer that contains the proximal throughhole and that has a thickness of between 20 nm and 50 nm. In some embodiments, the thin membrane layer comprises silicon nitride. In some embodiments, the excitation light has a wavelength of 380 nm or greater. In some embodiments, the solid substrate comprises surface portion(s) that define the reaction volume, and the surface portion(s) comprise at least one surface passivation coating. In some embodiments, one or more side walls of the reaction well comprise one or both of a silicon oxide coating and aluminum oxide coating. In some embodiments, the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises at least two different kinds of nucleotides, each kind labeled with a distinguishing fluorescent label.
[0029] In some embodiments, the carrier particle is not magnetic. In some embodiments, the carrier particle is magnetic. In some embodiments, during said reacting, the carrier particle is maintained next to the proximal throughhole by a voltage bias. In some embodiments, the carrier particle comprises a plurality of fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands having polynucleotide sequences that are different from each other. In some embodiments, after said reacting, the voltage bias is stopped to allow the carrier particle to move away from the proximal throughhole, so that the remaining fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is removed from the reaction volume, and then a voltage bias is applied to move the same or a different carrier particle toward the proximal throughhole so that a new fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is delivered into the reaction well for reacting with an exonuclease.
[0030] In some embodiments, the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand in the reaction volume comprises a double-stranded nucleic acid. In some embodiments, the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand in the reaction volume comprises a singlestranded nucleic acid. In some embodiments, the carrier particle comprises a plurality of fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands, which in some embodiments, are singlestranded or double-stranded nucleic acids.
[0031] In some embodiments, the solid state substrate comprises a plurality of reaction wells. In some embodiments, the plurality of reaction wells are configured as a onedimensional or two-dimensional array.
[0032] In some aspects, the sequencing method is directed to fluorescence-based analysis of oligonucleotide or polynucleotide barcodes using sequential digestion of fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands by exonuclease activity.
[0033] Fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands (also referred to as “fluorescently labeled strands” of “fluorescently labeled barcodes”) for sequencing may be prepared by any suitable method. Each fluorescently labeled strand may have a proximal end and a distal end. The proximal end is coupled, directly or indirectly, to a carrier particle as described further below. The distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand protrudes away from the carrier particle when the fluorescently labeled strand is coupled to a carrier particle. Each fluorescently labeled strand is capable of being cleaved by an exonuclease, so that mononucleotides, some or all of which comprise fluorescent labels, are released serially (one-by-one) from the distal end of the strand for subsequent detection (discussed further below).
[0034] In some embodiments, fluorescently labeled strands may be provided in singlestranded form, for serial cleavage of a distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand by a single-strand-specific exonuclease. In other embodiments, fluorescently labeled strands may be provided in double- stranded form comprising a fluorescently labeled strand, for serial cleavage of a distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand by a double-strand- specific exonuclease.
[0035] In some embodiments, a 5 ’-exonuclease is used. The 5 ’-exonuclease may be single-strand-specific or double-strand-specific. For a single-strand-specific 5’- exonuclease, the fluorescently labeled strand may be provided in single-stranded form such that the 3 ’-end is the proximal end coupled to the carrier particle, and the 5 ’-end is the distal end to be cleaved by the 5 ’-exonuclease. For a double- strand- specific 5’- exonuclease, all of the features of the immediately preceding sentence apply, except that the fluorescently labeled strand is provided in double- stranded form that comprises a complementary strand hybridized to the fluorescently labeled strand.
[0036] In some embodiments, a 3 ’-exonuclease is used. The 3 ’-exonuclease may be single-strand-specific or double-strand-specific. For a single-strand-specific 3’- exonuclease, the fluorescently labeled strand may be provided in single-stranded form such that the 5 ’-end is the proximal end coupled to the carrier particle, and the 3 ’-end is the distal end to be cleaved by the 3 ’-exonuclease. For a double- strand- specific 3’- exonuclease, all of the features of the immediately preceding sentence apply, except that
the fluorescently labeled strand is provided in double- stranded form that comprises a complementary strand hybridized to the fluorescently labeled strand.
[0037] A fluorescently labeled strand may also be provided in a form comprising a double- stranded region and a single- stranded region. For example, if a fluorescently labeled strand is provided in a double- stranded form and is hybridized to a complementary strand such that the fluorescently labeled strand comprises a single- stranded 3 ’-overhang extending from a double-stranded region, the 3 ’-overhang can be cleaved by a singlestrand specific 3 ’-exonuclease until the exonuclease reaches the double-stranded region. In this example, the 3 ’-end of the 3 ’-overhang is the distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand, and the 5 ’-end of the 3 ’-overhang is the proximal end of the fluorescently labeled strand. In an alternative example, if a fluorescently labeled strand is provided in a doublestranded form and is hybridized to a complementary strand that comprises a singlestranded 3 ’-overhang extending from a double-stranded region, a double- strand- specific 5 ’-exonuclease can cleave the recessed 5 ’-end of the fluorescently labeled strand in the double- stranded region. In this alternative example, the 5 ’-end of the fluorescently labeled strand is the distal end, and the 3 ’-end of the fluorescently labeled strand is the proximal end.
[0038] If a fluorescently labeled strand provided in a double- stranded form and is hybridized to a complementary strand such that the fluorescently labeled strand comprises a single- stranded 5 ’-overhang extending from a double- stranded region, the 5 ’-overhang can be cleaved by a single-strand specific 5 ’ -exonuclease until the exonuclease reaches the double- stranded region. In this example, the 5 ’-end of the 5 ’-overhang is the distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand, and the 3 ’-end of the 5 ’-overhang is the proximal end of the fluorescently labeled strand. In an alternative example, if a fluorescently labeled strand is provided in a double-stranded form and is hybridized to a complementary strand that comprises a single- stranded 5 ’-overhang extending from a double- stranded region, a double-strand-specific 3 ’ -exonuclease can cleave the recessed 3 ’-end of the fluorescently labeled strand in the double-stranded region. In this alternative example, the 3 ’-end of the fluorescently labeled strand is the distal end, and the 5 ’-end of the fluorescently labeled strand is the proximal end.
[0039] In some embodiments, the fluorescently labeled strands may be prepared by DNA polymerase-mediated extension (to make a fluorescently labeled DNA strand or barcode) or by RNA polymerase-mediated extension (to make a fluorescently labeled
RNA strand or barcode) of a primer that is complementary to a sample polynucleotide sequence.
[0040] In some embodiments, a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises one kind of nucleotide that is labeled with a fluorescent label. In some embodiments, a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises two different kinds of nucleotides, each kind labeled with a distinguishing fluorescent label. In some embodiments, a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises at least two different kinds of nucleotides, each kind labeled with a distinguishing fluorescent label. In some embodiments, a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises three different kinds of nucleotides, each kind labeled with a distinguishing fluorescent label. In some embodiments, a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises at least three different kinds of nucleotides, each kind labeled with a distinguishing fluorescent label. In some embodiments, a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises four different kinds of nucleotides, each kind labeled with a distinguishing fluorescent label.
[0041] In some embodiments, a nucleotide sequence of a target polynucleotide strand is determined by performing four separate reactions in which copies of the target polynucleotide strand have each of its four different kinds of nucleotide (A, C, G and T) labeled with one fluorescent label while at the same time the other nucleotides on the same target polynucleotide strand are labeled with a second fluorescent label. For example, if a first fluorescent label is attached to A's of the target polynucleotide strand in a first reaction, then a second fluorescent label is attached to C's, G's and T's (i.e. to the "not- A" nucleotides) of the target polynucleotide strands in the first reaction. Likewise, continuing with this example, in a second reaction, the first label is attached to C's of the target polynucleotide strand and the second fluorescent label is attached to A's, G's and T's (i.e. to the "not-C" nucleotides) of the target polynucleotide strand. And so on, for nucleotides G and T.
[0042] The same labeling scheme may be expressed in terms of conventional terminology for subsets of nucleotide types; thus, in the above example, in a first reaction, a first fluorescent label is attached to A's and a second fluorescent label is attached to B's; in a second reaction, a first fluorescent label is attached to C's and a second fluorescent label is attached to D's; in a third reaction, a first fluorescent label is attached to G's and a second fluorescent label is attached to H's; and in a fourth reaction, a first fluorescent label is attached to T's and a second fluorescent label is attached to Vs.
[0043] In some embodiments, a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises a single fluorescent label attached to a single kind of monomer, for example, every T (or substantially every T) of a polynucleotide strand is labeled with a fluorescent label, e.g. a cyanine dye. In such embodiments, a collection, or sequence, of fluorescent signals from the polynucleotide strand may form a signature or fingerprint for the particular polynucleotide. In some such embodiments, such fingerprints may or may not provide enough information for a sequence of monomers to be determined.
[0044] In some embodiments, fluorescent labels are mutually quenching. In some embodiments, fluorescent labels are not mutually quenching.
[0045] Mutually quenching fluorescent labels have the following properties: (i) each member quenches fluorescence of every member (for example, by FRET or by static or contact mechanisms), and (ii) each member generates a distinct fluorescent signal when excited and when in a non-quenched state. That is, if a mutually quenching set consists of two dyes, DI and D2, then (i) DI is self-quenched (e.g. by contact quenching with another DI molecule) and it is quenched by D2 (e.g. by contact quenching) and (ii) D2 is selfquenched (e.g. by contact quenching with another D2 molecule) and it is quenched by DI (e.g. by contact quenching). Contact quenching often occurs strongly between fluorescent labels on adjacent mononucleotides, but contact quenching may also occur between fluorescent labels on mononucleotides that are not adjacent to each other. Benefits of using mutually quenching fluorescent labels include, for example, minimizing nonspecific fluorescence background from fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands, and preserving the fluorescent labels from adventitious radical and triplet state species that may exist even in the non-illuminated (or negligibly illuminated) regions of reaction wells. [0046] Fluorescent labels include any fluorescent dyes chosen by the user for identifying attached mononucleotides in the methods of the invention. Exemplary fluorescent labels for labeling NTPs, dNTPs, NTP analogs and dNTP analogs, include, but are not limited to, xanthenes, fluoresceins, rhodamines, sulforhodamines, rhodals, cyanines, coumarins, and pyrenes. If different fluorescent labels are used to identify and distinguish different kinds of nucleotides, then the fluorescent labels can be from the same structural class of fluorescent labels (e.g., all are fluoresceins) or from different classes of fluorescent labels.
[0047] Exemplary guidance for selecting fluorescent labels for mutually quenching sets may be found in the following references, which are incorporated herein by reference: Johansson, Methods in Molecular Biology, 335: 17-29 (2006); Marras et al, Nucleic Acids
Research, 30: el22 (2002); and the like. In some embodiments, members of a mutually quenching set comprise organic fluorescent dyes that comprise components or moieties capable of stacking interactions, such as aromatic ring structures. In some embodiments, exemplary mutually quenching sets of fluorescent labels may be selected from rhodamine dyes, fluorescein dyes and cyanine dyes. In some embodiments, a mutually quenching set may comprise a rhodamine dye, TAMRA, and a fluorescein dye, FAM. In some embodiments, mutually quenching sets of fluorescent dyes may comprise two or more dyes selected from Oregon Green 488, Fluorescein-EX, fluorescein isothiocyanate, Rhodamine Red-X, Lissamine rhodamine B, Calcein, fluorescein, rhodamine, one or more BODIPY dyes, Texas Red, Oregon Green 514, and one or more Alexa Fluors. Exemplary BODIPY dyes include BODIPY FL, BODIPY R6G, BODIPY TMR, BODIPY 581/591, BODIPY TR, BODIPY 630/650 and BODIPY 650/665. Exemplary Alexa fluorescent labels include Alexa Fluor 350, Alexa Fluor 405, Alexa Fluor 430, Alexa Fluor 488, Alexa Fluor 500, Alexa Fluor 514, Alexa Fluor 532, Alexa Fluor 546, Alexa Fluor 555, Alexa Fluor 568, Alexa Fluor 594, Alexa Fluor 610, Alexa Fluor 633, Alexa Fluor 635, Alexa Fluor 647, Alexa Fluor 660, Alexa Fluor 680, Alexa Fluor 700, Alexa Fluor 750 and Alexa Fluor 790.
[0048] In further embodiments, exemplary fluorescent labels for labeling NTPs, dNTPs, NTP analogs and dNTP analogs, include, but are not limited to, Alexa 488, AMCA, Atto 655, Cy3, Cy5, Evoblue 30, fluorescein, Gnothis blue 1, Gnothis blue 2, Gnothis blue 3, Dy630, Dy635, MR121, rhodamine, Rhodamine Green, Oregon Green, TAMRA, and the like. Exemplary fluorescent labels for dUTP analogs include, but are not limited to, Alexa 488, AMCA, Atto 655, Cy3, Cy5, Dy630, Dy665, Evoblue 30, Evoblue 90, fluorescein, Gnothis blue 1, Gnothis blue 2, Gnothis blue 3, MR 121, Oregon Green, rhodamine, Rhodamine Green, TAMRA, and the like. Exemplary fluorescent labels for dCTP analogs include, but are not limited to, Atto 655, Cy5, Evoblue 30, Gnothis blue 3, rhodamine, Rhodamine Green, TAMRA, and the like. Exemplary fluorescent labels for dATP analogs include, but are not limited to, Atto 655, Cy5, Evoblue 30, Gnothis blue 3, Rhodamine Green, and the like. Exemplary fluorescent labels for dGTP analogs include, but are not limited to, Evoblue 30, Gnothis blue 3, Rhodamine Green, and the like. Exemplary pairs of fluorescent labels for dUTP analogs and dCTP analogs include, but are not limited to, TAMRA, Rhodamine Green, Atto 655, Evoblue 30, Evoblue 30, Atto 655, Evoblue 30, Gnothis blue 3, Evoblue 30, Rhodamine Green,
Gnothis blue 1, Rhodamine Green, Gnothis blue 2, Atto 655), Gnothis blue 3, Cy5, and the like.
[0049] In further embodiments, exemplary fluorescent labels for labeling NTPs, dNTPs, NTP analogs and dNTP analogs, include, but are not limited to, Oregon Green 488, fluorescein-EX, FITC, Rhodamine Red-X, Lissamine rhodamine B, calcein, fluorescein, rhodamine, BODIPYs, and Texas Red, e.g. which are disclosed in Molecular Probes Handbook — A Guide to Fluorescent Probes and Eabeling Technologies, 11th Edition (2010) as revised online as of the date of the present disclosure.
[0050] Further guidance for selecting kinds of nucleotide to label, kinds of labels, linkers for attachment, and nucleic acid polymerases for synthesizing fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands in the presence of NTPs, dNTPs, NTP analogs, and/or dNTP analogs, can be found in the following references, which are incorporated by reference: Goodman et al, U.S. patent 5,945,312; Jett et al, U.S. patent 5,405,747; Muehlegger et al, U.S. patent publication US2004/0214221 ; Giller et al, Nucleic Acids Research, 31(10): 2630-2635 (2003); Tasara et al, Nucleic Acids Research 31(10): 2636-2646 (2003); Augustin et al, J. Biotechnology, 86: 289-301 (2001); Brakmann, Current Pharmaceutical Biotechnology, 5(1): 119-126 (2004); and Anderson et al., BioTechniques 38:257-264 (2005); for example.
[0051] Exemplary nucleic acid polymerases for synthesizing fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands in the presence of NTPs, dNTPs, NTP analogs and/or dNTP analogs, include, but are not limited to, Vent (exo minus) polymerase, Taq polymerase, E. coli Pol I, Tgo (exo minus) polymerase, Klenow fragment (exo minus), Thermococcus kodakaraensis KOD1 DNA polymerase (EMD Millipore and other suppliers), Deep Vent (exo minus) polymerase, Therminator polymerase, Pfu (exo minus) polymerase, Pfu alfalfa mosaic virus reverse transcriptase, murine leukemia virus reverse transcriptase, T4 polymerase, and the like. In some embodiments, exemplary nucleic acid polymerases include, but are not limited to, Vent (exo minus) polymerase and Klenow fragment (exo minus). It is noted that exo minus polymerases have greater processivity relative to corresponding polymerases that retain 3 ’-exonuclease activity, so that synthesis of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands can be accomplished more efficiently.
[0052] In other embodiments, selected kinds of nucleotides of a strand are labeled by incorporating analog dNTPs of the selected kinds of nucleotides in an extension reaction, wherein the analog dNTPs are derivatized with orthogonally reactive functionalities that allow attachment of different labels to different kinds of nucleotides in a subsequent
reaction, as described, for example, in Jett et al, U.S. patent 5,405,747, which is incorporated herein by reference.
[0053] The carrier particles have dimensions that are sufficiently large to prevent the carrier particles from moving through the throughholes of the reaction wells into the reaction wells. Each carrier particle is capable of being moved by an electromagnetic force to be near a throughhole of a reaction well to deliver the distal end of a first fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand, which is attached to the carrier particle, through the throughhole into a reaction well. In some embodiments, the carrier particles are magnetic carrier particles. In some embodiments, the carrier particles are not magnetic carrier particles. In some embodiments, the electromagnetic force is a voltage bias. In some embodiments, the electromagnetic force is a magnetic force.
[0054] In some embodiments, carrier particles have a diameter, or a largest diameter, that is at least 15 nm, or at least 20 nm, or at least 25 nm, or at least 30 nm, or from 15 nm to 100 nm, or from 15 nm to 75 nm, or from 15 nm to 50 nm, or from 20 nm to 50 nm. However, carrier particles having larger or smaller diameters may also be used. As used herein, “nanoparticle” refers to a carrier particle having a diameter, or largest diameter, that is less than 200 nm, or less than 150 nm, or less than 100 nm.
[0055] The carrier particles may be charged or uncharged. The carrier particles may have a net neutral charge, a net positive charge, or a net negative charge, based on the net balance of positively charged groups and negatively charged groups on the particles under the pH conditions of the surrounding aqueous medium, which usually comprises an aqueous buffer. Preferably, for control of movement by an electric field (voltage bias), the carrier particles have a net negative charge when they comprise one or more attached fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands.
[0056] In some embodiments, each carrier particle is capable of being moved by an electromagnetic force away from a throughhole of a reaction well, to remove a cleaved fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand from the throughhole. In preferred embodiments of methods of the present invention, after exonuclease cleavage of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand in a well, the carrier particle is moved away from the well so that the cleaved strand is withdrawn from the well, and then the same or a different carrier particle is moved near the throughhole of the well to deliver the distal end of a second (sometimes called “new”) fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand through the throughhole into the reaction well. To facilitate movement of distal ends of
fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand into and out of the reaction wells by voltage bias or magnetic field, the carrier particles are not covalently coupled to the throughholes. [0057] In some embodiments, the carrier particles comprise spherical particles. In some embodiments, the carrier particles comprise non-spherical particles, having, for example, elliptoid or irregular shapes. In some embodiments, the carrier particles comprise both spherical particles and non-spherical particles. In some embodiments, the carrier particles are provided as a uniform population of substantially identical carrier particles within a size range (e.g., within plus or minus a standard deviation or coefficient of variation), but the carrier particles are not necessarily identical, provided that they effectively carry and deliver fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands to the reaction wells.
[0058] Carrier particles may be made from any materials that are suitable for the purposes of the present invention. In some embodiments, the carrier particles are metal particles, such as metal nanoparticles. In some embodiments, the carrier particles are gold nanoparticles. In some embodiments, the carrier particles are silver nanoparticles. In some embodiments, one or more carrier particles comprise one or more magnetic materials, such as iron or iron oxide, that allow the particles to be moved by a magnetic field. In some embodiments, the carrier particles are iron oxide particles. In some embodiments, the carrier particles are silica particles or controlled pore glass particles. [0059] In some embodiments, the carrier particles comprise an immobilized protein, such as streptavidin or an antigen-specific antibody, for binding a biotin moiety or antigen moiety that is attached to or associated with a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to be sequenced. In some embodiments, the carrier particles are proteins, such as streptavidins or antibodies, for binding one or more biotinylated oligonucleotides or antigen-oligonucleotide conj ugates .
[0060] Fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands may be attached to carrier particles by any suitable means. Usually, fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands are attached to carrier particles by means of a capture moiety. Capture moieties usually comprise members of a pair of moieties that have a mutual affinity for each other (also referred to as a “binding pair”). In some embodiments, capture moieties are polypeptides such as antibodies or antigens. In some embodiments, capture moieties are oligonucleotides that are complementary to sequences in, or associated with, the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to be sequenced.
[0061] Capture moieties may be monovalent (for capturing one binding partner) or multivalent (for capturing multiple binding partners). Avidin is an example of a monovalent capture moiety, and streptavidin, with four biotin binding sites, is an example of a multivalent capture moiety. In some embodiments, the capture moiety comprises an antibody (for specifically binding one or two antigens). More generally, the capture member may be any member of a binding pair for which the other member of the pair is associated with a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to facilitate attachment of the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to the carrier particle.
[0062] Usually, if a carrier particle is not itself a capture moiety (e.g., if the carrier particle is not streptavidin, an antibody, or another monovalent or multivalent entity), the carrier particle comprises at least one, and preferably a plurality, of capture moieties by which fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands may be attached directly or indirectly to the carrier particles.
[0063] Capture moieties are usually attached to carrier particles by linkers. Any suitable linker may be used. Since exonuclease cleavage and other elements of the present invention are usually performed in aqueous solution, linkers are usually hydrophilic. Exemplary linkers include polymers such as polyethylene glycol, polyamides, poly(polyethylene glycol phosphates), polyalkyl phosphates, polyamines, and the like. Such linkers may have any suitable length. Some illustrative linkers and conjugation methods are described in Example 1 below.
[0064] Exemplary functional group pairs and their resulting linkages for attaching capture moieties to carrier particles are shown in Table 1 below.
[0065] Fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands are immobilized on (attached to) carrier particles by any suitable means. In some embodiments, fluorescently labeled
polynucleotide strands are each synthesized by nucleic acid polymerase-mediated template-dependent primer extension using sample template strands. In some embodiments, a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is synthesized from a sample template nucleic acid strand in solution, before attachment of the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to a carrier particle. In some embodiments, fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands are synthesized on the carrier particle by polymerase-mediated primer extension after a sample template nucleic acid strand has been hybridized to a complementary primer (acting as a “capture moiety”) attached to the carrier particle. [0066] In some embodiments, the carrier particle comprises one or more oligonucleotides that are complementary to a sequence of a sample nucleic acid strand. In some embodiments, the carrier particle comprises one or more oligonucleotides that are complementary to a sequence of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand. In some embodiments, the one or more oligonucleotides are coupled by their 5 ’-ends to the carrier particle. In some embodiments, the one or more oligonucleotides are coupled by their 3’- ends to the carrier particle.
[0067] In some embodiments, when, for example, an oligonucleotide is coupled by its 5 ’-end to a carrier particle, a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands may be synthesized on the carrier particle by polymerase-mediated template-dependent extension of the 3’ end (the 3 ’-hydroxyl) of the oligonucleotide as a primer. A sample nucleic acid is hybridized to the immobilized oligonucleotide such that the 3 ’-end of the oligonucleotide is hybridized to a sequence region that is upstream of the region of the sample nucleic acid strand to be sequenced. In the presence of one or more different nucleotide triphosphates that comprise fluorescently labeled nucleotide triphosphates corresponding to one or more of ATP, CTP, GTP, and TTP or UTP, the polymerase synthesizes a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand that is complementary to the hybridized sample nucleic acid strand by extending the 3 ’-end of the immobilized oligonucleotide as a primer to incorporate complementary labeled nucleotides into a growing primer extension product that becomes the fluorescently labeled strand.
[0068] In some embodiments, as noted above, the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands may be formed in solution using a non-immobilized primer. The primer is hybridized to a complementary sample nucleic acid sequence that is upstream of the region of the sample nucleic acid strand to be sequenced. After polymerase-mediated primer extension in the presence of one or more different fluorescently labeled nucleotide triphosphates, the resulting hybridization complex (which comprises the sample nucleic
acid strand hybridized to the newly synthesized fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand) may be contacted with a capture oligonucleotide that is already immobilized on the carrier particle, so that the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand becomes immobilized on the carrier particle by hybridization of the sample strand I fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand complex to the capture oligonucleotide.
[0069] In some embodiments, after a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is formed in solution using a non-immobilized primer, the resulting sample strand I fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand hybridization complex is immobilized on a carrier particle by hybridization of the capture oligonucleotide to a sequence in the sample nucleic acid strand.
[0070] In some embodiments, after a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is formed in solution using a non-immobilized primer, the resulting sample strand I fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand hybridization complex is immobilized on a carrier particle by hybridization of the capture oligonucleotide to a sequence in the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand. For example, the sample strand I fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand hybridization complex may be immobilized on a carrier particle by hybridization of the capture oligonucleotide to a sequence in the primer that was used to synthesize the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand.
[0071] In some embodiments, the primer comprises a non-polynucleotide affinity moiety, such biotin or an antigen moiety, and the carrier particle comprises a streptavidin moiety or antibody moiety, so that after a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is formed in solution using a non-immobilized primer, the resulting sample strand I fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand hybridization complex is immobilized on the carrier particle by binding between the immobilized streptavidin moiety and the biotin moiety (or between the immobilized antibody and the antigen moiety).
[0072] As noted above, fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands of the invention are cleaved using one or more exonucleases. An exonuclease is selected to have substantially no endonuclease activity, to ensure that the exonuclease cleaves only single, consecutive mononucleotides from the distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand. The exonuclease may be a 3 ’-specific exonuclease or a 5 ’-specific exonuclease, and the exonuclease may cleave a fluorescently labeled strand that is provided in single- stranded or double- stranded form.
[0073] Any suitable exonuclease may be used. Exonucleases may be native (i.e., have a chemical structure found in nature) or modified relative to their native structures, and
may be from their natural sources or from recombinant hosts. For example, exonucleases may be chemically modified after isolation or purification, and may also be generated by combinatorial and recombinant techniques, including for example screening for exonucleases with desired properties. Exemplary 3 ’-specific exonucleases include, for example, E. coli exonuclease III, exonuclease X, yeast TatD exonuclease XI, the 3’- exonuclease activity of T7 DNA polymerase, the 3 ’-exonuclease activity of T4 DNA polymerase, the 3 ’-exonuclease activity E. coli DNA polymerase I Klenow fragment, the 3 ’-exonuclease activity of Vent® DNA polymerase, the 3 ’-exonuclease activity of Deep Vent® DNA polymerase, the 3 ’-exonuclease activity of Q5® High-Fidelity DNA polymerase, the 3 ’-exonuclease activity of Q5U® Hot Start High-Fidelity DNA polymerase, the 3 ’-exonuclease activity of Phusion® High-Fidelity DNA polymerase, and the 3 ’ -exonuclease activity of phi29 DNA polymerase. Exemplary 5 ’-specific exonucleases include, for example, T7 exonuclease, the 5 ’-exonuclease activity of Taq DNA polymerase, the 5 ’-exonuclease activity of Epimark® Hot Start Taq DNA polymerase, and the 5 ’-exonuclease activity of Bst DNA polymerase.
[0074] In some cases, an exonuclease may cleave a strand that is present as a single strand or is present in a double stranded structure. For example, yeast TatD exonuclease XI is able to cleave a nucleic acid strand in the 3’ to 5’ direction in a single-stranded form or a double-stranded form.
[0075] Nucleases that have both 3 ’-exonuclease activity and 5 ’-exonuclease activity include, for example, E. coli DNA polymerase I, OneTaq® DNA polymerase, and Long Amp® Taq DNA polymerase. Such exonucleases may be used without modification to exploit one (e.g., 3’ to 5’) of their exonuclease activities to cleave fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands if none of the polynucleotide strands in the reaction mixture are cleavable by the other (e.g., 5’ to 3’) exonuclease activity. Alternatively, it may be desirable to modify such exonucleases, e.g., by recombinant or chemical modification, to retain the desired exonuclease activity and inactivate the unwanted exonuclease activity. [0076] Exonucleases that have exonuclease activity towards single- stranded nucleic acids, include, for example, E. coli RNAse T, E. coli exonuclease I, E. coli thermolabile exonuclease I, E. coli exonuclease VII, mung bean nuclease, venom exonuclease, exonuclease VII, RecJf exonuclease, and BAL-31 exonuclease.
[0077] To the extent that any of the foregoing enzymes (e.g., polymerases) have other enzymatic activities in addition to exonuclease activity, reaction conditions are selected to suppress those activities so that they do not interfere with polynucleotide sequencing
according to the present invention. For example, in some embodiments, polymerization activity will be negligible or non-existent under exonuclease cleavage reaction conditions that do not include any of the standard nucleotide 5-triphosphates that are substrates for polymerization.
[0078] In some aspects of the inventions disclosed herein, a solid state substrate comprises a cis side and a trans side. The substrate comprises a reaction well that defines a reaction volume. The reaction well comprises (i) a proximal throughhole extending between the cis side and the trans side of the substrate, (ii) one or more side walls, and (iii) a distal opening. The solid state substrate further comprises an opaque metal layer that substantially blocks excitation light that is incident on the trans side of the substrate from penetrating into the reaction volume of the reaction well and from penetrating to the cis side of the substrate.
[0079] Reaction wells for containing fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands to be sequenced may have any of a variety of shapes and sizes. For example, although cylindrical wells with circular cross-sections and parallel side walls are suitable, reaction wells may also have elliptical, triangular, square, rectangular, pentagonal, hexagonal, octagonal or other regular or irregular cross-sectional shapes, with parallel or non-parallel side walls. For example, the side walls of reaction wells having any of the foregoing shapes may be parallel, tapered, truncated-conical, or hour-glass shaped. For example, a cylindrical well may be considered to have a single side wall that is inherently parallel with itself.
[0080] Reaction wells may have any of a variety of dimensions that may be chosen by the user. The choice of specific dimensions can take into consideration a selected length and a minimum diameter of the fluorescently labeled strands that will be sequenced, whether the fluorescently labeled strands are in single- or double-stranded form, and any other relevant considerations.
[0081] The depth and minimum diameters of reaction wells are usually selected so that each reaction well can contain (1) a distal end of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to be sequenced and also (2) an exonuclease molecule that is bound to the distal end of the strand during nucleolytic cleavage of terminal mononucleotides.
[0082] As used herein, “minimum diameter” means the shortest diameter of a reaction well or of a throughhole, as applicable. For example, a cylinder has a single diameter, which is the minimum diameter. For a reaction well having a square overhead crosssection that is perpendicular to the depth axis of the reaction well, the minimum diameter
is the distance between (and perpendicular to) two opposing walls of the reaction well (the length of a side of the square cross-section), whereas the maximum diameter is the length of a diagonal across the square cross-section. For a reaction well having tapered or other non-parallel walls, the minimum diameter of the reaction well is the shortest dimension in a cross-section of the well. More generally, the distal opening, and at least a portion of the reaction well extending from the distal opening, have a minimum diameter that satisfies requirements (1) and (2) above. Therefore, if the distal opening of a reaction well has a particular minimum diameter, then the minimum diameter of at least a portion of, or all of, the reaction well extending from the distal opening towards the throughhole of the well is equal to or greater than the minimum diameter of the distal opening of a reaction well. [0083] In some embodiments, the reaction well, or the distal opening of the reaction well, has a minimum diameter of at least 30 nm, or at least 40 nm, or at least 50 nm, or at least 60 nm, or at least 70 nm, or at least 80 nm, or at least 90 nm, or at least 100 nm. In some embodiments, the reaction well has a minimum diameter that is less than 150 nm, or less than 120 nm, or less than 100 nm, or less than 90 nm, or less than 80 nm. In some embodiments, the reaction well has a minimum diameter of 30 nm to 250 nm, or 30 nm to 150 nm, or 30 nm to 120, or 30 nm to 100, or 30 nm to 90 nm, or 50 nm to 150 nm, or 50 nm to 120 nm, or 50 nm to 100 nm, or 50 nm to 90 nm, or 80 nm to 120 nm.
[0084] The depth of the reaction well is usually selected to be longer than the length of the segment of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand that will be cleaved by the exonuclease to generate sequence information. Double- stranded DNA has a relatively rigid rod shape, with unit length of about one basepair per 3.6 Angstroms (0.36 nm). Therefore, a dsDNA segment that contains 1000 contiguous basepairs has a length of about 360 nm. Accordingly, a reaction well depth of 400 nm may be appropriate to enclose an immobilized 1000 bp dsDNA without exposing the distal end of the dsDNA to unwanted excitation light, and a well depth of 500 nm may provide even better protection from unwanted excitation light. Alternatively, for a single- stranded DNA or RNA strand, a reaction well depth of 400 nm may enclose an immobilized fluorescently labeled strand having more than 1000 contiguous bases without exposing the distal end of the dsDNA to unwanted excitation light, since single-stranded nucleic acids are less rigid and have a smaller diameter than double-stranded nucleic acids.
[0085] In some embodiments, the reaction well has a well depth of at least 150 nm, or at least 200 nm, or at least 300 nm, or at least 400 nm, or at least 500 nm. In some embodiments, the reaction well has a well depth that is less than 1000 nm, or is less than
800 nm, or is less than 700 nm, or is less than 600 nm, or is less than 500 nm. In some embodiments, the reaction well has a well depth of 150 nm to 1000 nm, or 150 nm to 800 nm, or 150 nm to 700 nm, or 150 nm to 600 nm, or 150 nm to 500 nm. In some embodiments, the reaction well has a well depth of 200 nm to 1000 nm, or 200 nm to 800 nm, or 200 nm to 700 nm, or 200 nm to 600 nm, or 200 nm to 500 nm. In some embodiments, the reaction well has a well depth of 300 nm to 1000 nm, or 300 nm to 800 nm, or 300 nm to 700 nm, or 300 nm to 600 nm, or 300 nm to 500 nm. In some embodiments, the reaction well has a well depth of 400 nm to 1000 nm, or 400 nm to 800 nm, or 400 nm to 700 nm, or 400 nm to 600 nm, or 400 nm to 500 nm.
[0086] As noted above, the reaction well also comprises a proximal throughhole extending between the cis side and the trans side of the substrate. Here, “proximal” throughhole means that the throughhole is closer to the cis side of the substrate than is the distal opening of the associated reaction well. Each proximal throughhole has a minimum diameter that is (1) sufficiently large to allow the distal end of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to be drawn into and through the throughhole by an electric field, and (2) is sufficiently small to prevent the carrier particle to which the fluorescently labeled strand is attached from passing through the throughhole to the trans side of the substrate. Preferably, the minimum diameter of the proximal throughhole is sufficiently small to prevent any exonuclease molecules from passing through the proximal throughhole from the trans side to the cis side of the substrate. In some embodiments, each proximal throughhole has a minimum diameter that is smaller than the smallest dimension of the exonuclease.
[0087] In some embodiments, the proximal throughhole has a minimum diameter of at least 2 nm. In some embodiments, the proximal throughhole has a minimum diameter of 2 nm to 50 nm, or 3 nm to 50 nm, or 5 nm to 50 nm, or 10 nm to 50 nm, or 20 nm to 50 nm, or 2 nm to 40 nm, or 3 nm to 40 nm, or 5 nm to 40 nm, or 10 nm to 40 nm, or 20 nm to 40 nm, or 3 nm to 30 nm, or 5 nm to 30 nm, or 10 nm to 30 nm, or 2 nm to 20 nm, or 3 nm to 20 nm, or 5 nm to 20 nm, or 10 nm to 20 nm, or 2 nm to 10 nm, or 3 nm to 10 nm, or 5 nm to 10 nm.
[0088] In some embodiments, the proximal throughhole has a longitudinal thickness of at least 10 nm, or at least 15 nm, or at least 20 nm, or from 10 to 60 nm, or from 10 to 50 nm or from 10 to 40 nm, or from 20 to 60 nm, or from 20 to 50 nm, or from 20 to 40 nm, or from 30 to 60 nm, or from 30 to 50 nm.
[0089] In some embodiments, the substrate comprises a thin membrane layer that contains the proximal throughhole. In some embodiments, the thin membrane layer comprises silicon nitride (SiN).
[0090] Substrates comprising reaction wells for use in the present inventions may be fabricated by any suitable method, in various forms of solid materials including but not being limited to silicones (e.g. SLN4, SiCh), metals, metal oxides (e.g. AI2O3) plastics, glass, semiconductor material, and combinations thereof. Fabrication techniques for making solid state substrates can be found in the following exemplary references that are incorporated by reference: Golovchenko et al, U.S. patent 6,464,842; Sauer et al, U.S. patent 7,001,792; Su et al, U.S. patent 7,744,816; Meller et al, International patent publication W02009/020682; Yan et al, Nano Letters, 5(6): 1129-1134 (2005); Wanunu et al, Nano Letters, 7(6): 1580-1585 (2007); Dekker, Nature Nanotechnology, 2: 209-215 (2007); Storm et al, Nature Materials, 2: 537-540 (2003); Zhe et al, J. Micromech.
Microeng., 17: 304-313 (2007); and the like.
[0091] The solid state substrate comprises one or more light-blocking layers referred to herein as opaque metal layers. Each opaque metal layer reflects and/or absorbs incident light from the excitation beam, thereby (1) protecting the fluorescently labeled strands in the reaction well and on the cis side of the substrate from photobleaching and from other damage caused by incident light, and (2) preventing incident light from causing labels in the fluorescently labeled strands to fluoresce before being cleaved from the labeled strand by the exonuclease, potentially interfering with the correct fluorescent signals from cleaved fluorescently labeled mononucleotides.
[0092] An opaque metal layer may comprise Sn, Al, V, Ti, Ni, Mo, Ta, W, Au, Ag or Cu, for example, and/or alloys or combinations thereof. In some embodiments, an opaque metal layer comprises Al, Au, Ag or Cu. In some embodiments, an opaque metal layer comprises aluminum (Al) or gold (Au). The composition of the opaque metal layer may be selected based on the wavelength-dependence of the metal’s reflectance of incident light. For fluorescence detection in the present invention, incident light is typically in the visible spectrum in the range of from about 380 nm to about 740 nm. Aluminum exhibits a reflectance of about 90% across the entire visible spectrum, making it a good candidate for use as an opaque layer. Gold exhibits a reflectance of about 35% for wavelengths between about 260 nm to about 480 nm and then rises sharply for wavelengths between about 480 nm to 700, exceeding about 90% for wavelengths greater than about 550 nm. Thus, gold has good light blocking characteristics across the visible spectrum, especially
for wavelengths above about 480 nm, particularly in the red and infrared regions. Silver has a reflectance above about 80% for wavelengths above about 350 nm.
[0093] In some embodiments, the substrate comprises two or more opaque metal layers. For example, the substrate may comprise a gold layer and an aluminum layer, both of which reflect and/or absorb incident light impinging on the trans side of the substrate. In some embodiments, the substrate comprises a gold layer over an aluminum layer, such that the aluminum layer is closer to the cis side of the substrate than is the gold layer. One benefit of having a gold top layer (which may also be referred to as an outer gold layer or distal gold layer, and which surrounds the distal opening of the reaction well) is that gold can enhance the intensity of light excitation around the distal opening of the reaction well, thereby increasing the yield of fluorescent signals from each released fluorescently labeled mononucleotide that diffuses through the excitation zone. In some embodiments, the substrate comprises a distal aluminum layer over a gold layer, such that the gold layer is closer to the cis side of the substrate than is the aluminum layer.
[0094] The thickness of an opaque metal layer may vary and depends on the physical and chemical properties of material composing the opaque layer. In some embodiments, the thickness of an opaque layer may be at least 40 nm, or at least 80 nm, or at least 120 nm, or at least 200 nm, or at least 300 nm. In other embodiments, the thickness of an opaque layer may be in the range of from 50 to 700 nm; in other embodiments, the thickness of an opaque layer may be in the range of from 100 to 600 nm. If the substrate comprises more than one opaque metal layer, then “thickness” refers to the thickness of each individual layer.
[0095] An opaque metal layer need not block (i.e. reflect or absorb) 100 percent of the light from an excitation beam. In some embodiments, the opaque metal layer, or plurality of opaque metal layers if more than one layer is present, blocks at least 30%, at least 50%, or at least 90%, or at least 95%, or at least 99%, or at least 99.5%, or at least 99.9% of the excitation light that is incident on the distal opening of a reaction well at a depth that is 50 nm from the proximal throughhole of the reaction well.
[0096] Opaque layers may be fabricated by a variety of techniques. Material deposition techniques may be used including chemical vapor deposition, electrodeposition, epitaxy, thermal oxidation, physical vapor deposition, including evaporation and sputtering, casting, for example. In some embodiments, atomic layer deposition may be used, e.g. U.S. patent 6,464,842; Wei et al, Small, 6(13): 1406-1414 (2010), which are incorporated by reference.
[0097] The solid state substrate may comprise other layers. For example, a solid state substrate may comprise one or more non-opaque layers to increase the depth of the reaction well(s) in the substrate. Such a dielectric layer may comprise SiO2, TiO2, for example.
[0098] In some embodiments, a solid state substrate may comprise a thin adhesive layer between two other layers to enhance stability of the layers and deter delamination or other kinds of damage. For example, including a thin adhesive layer between a gold layer and an aluminum layer can enhance the adherence of the gold layer in the solid state substrate, as taught by Aouani et al., ACS Nano 3(7):2043-2048 (2009). Such a thin adhesive layer may comprise any suitable material, including for example chromium, titanium, titanium dioxide, chromium oxide, or nickel. A thin adhesive layer may have any suitable thickness. For example, a thin adhesive layer may have a thickness from 1 nm to 40 nm, or 5 nm to 20 nm. In some embodiments, when a thin adhesive layer is tens or hundreds of nanometers from the distal opening of the reaction well, the thin adhesive layer has negligible or no effect on the fluorescence yield of fluorescently labeled mononucleotides diffusing through the excitation zone. In some embodiments, when a thin adhesive layer is near (e.g., within 10 or 20 or 30 nm of) the edge of distal opening of the reaction well, the thickness and composition of the thin adhesive layer may be selected to provide optimal enhancement of fluorescence excitation in the excitation zone. In some embodiments, the solid state substrate comprises a plurality of thin adhesive layers. For example, the solid state substrate may comprise a first thin adhesive layer between a first opaque metal layer and a second opaque metal layer, and a second thin adhesive layer between the second opaque metal layer and a dielectric layer such as SiCh or SiN.
[0099] In some embodiments, the solid state substrate comprises a multilayer structure having a plurality of layers for various purposes. Exemplary multilayer structure include a substrate having the following layers from cis side to trans side listed left to right:
(1) SiN (30 nm), Cr (5 nm), Au (300 nm)
(2) SiN (30 nm), Al (200 nm), Cr (5 nm), Au (300 nm)
(3) SiN (30 nm), SiO2 (200 nm), Cr (5 nm), Au (300 nm)
(4) SiN (30 nm), SiO2 (200 nm), Al (200 nm), Cr (5 nm), Au (300 nm)
(5) SiN (30 nm), Al (400 nm)
[0100] Throughholes may be fabricated in solid state membranes in a variety of materials including but not limited to, silicon nitride, silicon dioxide (SiO2), and the like. Although silicon nitride is often symbolized as Si2N4 (indicating a Si:N stoichiometry of
3:4), silicon/nitrogen mixtures having other stoichiometric ratios of silicon and nitride may be used. For example, a Si:N stoichiometry close to 3:4 but between 3:4 and 4:4 may have lower structural stress than Si N4.
[0101] In general, the methods and substrates of the present invention do not comprise or require protein nanopores or lipid bilayers, thereby avoiding their complexity and instability problems.
[0102] Solid state throughholes may be prepared in a variety of ways, as exemplified in the references cited above. In some embodiments a helium ion microscope may be used to drill synthetic throughholes in a variety of materials, e.g. as disclosed by Yang et al, Nanotechnology, 22: 285310 (2011). A chip that supports one or more regions of a thin- film material, e.g. silicon nitride, that has been processed to be a free-standing membrane is introduced to the helium ion microscope (HIM) chamber. HIM motor controls are used to bring a free-standing membrane into the path of the ion beam while the microscope is set for low magnification. Beam parameters including focus and stigmation are adjusted at a region that is adjacent to the free-standing membrane, but on the solid substrate. Once the parameters have been properly fixed, the chip position is moved such that the freestanding membrane region is centered on the ion beam scan region and the beam is blanked. The HIM field of view is set to a dimension (in microns) that is sufficient to contain the entire anticipated reaction well pattern and sufficient to be useful in optical readout (i.e. dependent on optical magnification, camera resolution, etc.). Optionally, the ion beam is then rastered once through the entire field of view at a pixel dwell time that results in a total ion dose sufficient to remove all or most of the membrane autofluorescence, if any (e.g., see WO 2014/066905). The field of view is then set to the proper value (smaller than that used above) to perform lithographically-defined milling of either a single throughhole or an array of throughholes that aligned with the corresponding reaction wells. For example, the throughholes may be made to be coaxial, or not coaxial, with the corresponding reaction wells. The pixel dwell time of the pattern is set to result in throughholes of one or more predetermined diameters, which are optionally determined through the use of a calibration sample prior to sample processing. This entire process is repeated for each desired region on a single chip and/or for each chip introduced into the HIM chamber.
[0103] The depth and diameter of a reaction well, together with the type(s) and thickness(s) of the one or more opaque metal layers of the substrate, may also be selected to achieve an acceptable level of, or to minimize, excitation light in the well away from
the distal opening and towards the proximal throughhole. Generally, the intensity of light incident on the distal opening of a well becomes exponentially weaker as it progresses more deeply in to the well towards the throughhole, so that most of the reaction volume is substantially dark, especially near the proximal throughhole. This is particularly so when an opaque metal layer surrounds the distal opening of the reaction well. A benefit of this phenomenon is that a substantial portion or all of the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand in the reaction well is protected from unwanted excitation by incident light. This reduces background fluorescence and unwanted modification or degradation of the fluorescently labeled strand. Thus, a deeper well provides greater protection from the incident light, so that a greater proportion of the reaction well is substantially light-free than for a reaction well having the same diameter but smaller depth. A deeper well also provides more space for a longer fluorescently labeled strand to be sequenced. Similarly, a well with a smaller distal opening provides greater darkness in the well away from the distal opening than is provided with a larger distal opening. These general trends are illustrated for example in Table 2 below, which shows light intensities measured in a simulation using Lumerical (March 2020) software available from Lumerical Inc., Vancouver, Canada. More specifically, Intensity was calculated for a well depth 50 nm from the throughhole of the wells (having aluminum side walls) as a fraction of incident light intensity (640 nm) at the distal openings.
[0104] In some embodiments, each reaction well has a combination of depth and minimum diameter exemplified by the combinations in Table 3 below.
Table 3
[0105] The substrate, especially surfaces of the substrate that will be in contact with reaction components may also be coated with one or more coatings to impart desirable properties, such as inertness, non-reactivity, or non-affinity towards buffer or reaction components such as exonuclease, fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands, released mononucleotides, and/or other reaction components or buffer components.
[0106] In some embodiments, one or more coatings may be applied to the surfaces of the substrate (also referred to herein as “inner surfaces” of the substrate) that may contact one or more buffer components and/or reaction components that are used or are generated in methods of the present invention. For example, such coatings may help passivate surfaces of the reaction wells to reduce their affinity towards exonucleases and/or mononucleotides. Such coatings may also be used to protect metal components from oxidation or other degradative processes, or to reduce electroosmotic flow (EOF) of buffer ions along such surfaces that can create aqueous flow along the walls of the well.
[0107] In some embodiments, the inner surfaces of the reaction well, the inner surfaces of the throughhole, or the inner surfaces of both the reaction well and throughhole comprise at least one coating. In some embodiments, a single coating is applied. In some embodiments, a plurality of coatings is applied. In some embodiments, when a plurality of coatings is applied, the coatings are the same. In some embodiments, when a plurality of coatings is applied, the coatings are not the same. Such coatings may have any suitable thickness selected by the user. For example, a coating may have a thickness from 1 nm to
20 nm, or from 1 nm and 10 nm, or from 2 nm to 10 nm, or from 5 nm to 10 nm.
Preferably, the coating thickness is substantially uniform, as may be provided by a variety of methods, such as atomic layer deposition (ALD).
[0108] In some embodiments, a coating comprises an inorganic coating. In some embodiments, an inorganic coating comprises a film comprising Hl'Ch, AI2O3, SiCh, TiCb, SiN, or Pt. Such a coating may be made by any suitable method. For example, such a coating may be added by ALD. Such coatings are particularly suitable for coating a variety of metal surfaces, such as aluminum, copper, and gold, and also for coating a variety of other types of material surfaces, such as silicon and silicon nitride. In some embodiments, in which the substrate comprises a gold layer, the gold surface may be coated with an organic thiolate compound. See for example Li et al., Bioconjugate Chem. 24(11): 1790-1797 (2013). In some embodiments, in which the substrate comprises a nongold metal or metal oxide layer, the metal or metal oxide surface may be coated with a phosphonic acid-containing compound such as taught by Mutin et al., Chemical Materials 16:5670-5675 (2004), Gao et al., Langmuir 12:6429-6435 (1996), and Zoulalian et al., J. Physical Chemistry B 110:25603-25605 (2006).
[0109] In some embodiments, the substrate comprises a dynamic coating comprising polyvinyl pyrrolidone, which may be present in the buffer in which the sequencing methods of the present invention is performed. Such a coating may be particularly suitable for coating SiN, SiCh, and metal oxides, for example. In some embodiments, such a coating may reduce non-specific binding of exonuclease, mononucleotides, or other buffer or reaction components.
[0110] In some embodiments, the solid state substrate comprises a plurality of reaction wells as described in this disclosure, each of which may contain a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand for sequencing. The plurality of reaction wells may be arranged in any configuration, such as a random or non-random configuration, and are usually disposed in a plane. In some embodiments, the reaction wells are configured as an array to facilitate the performance of a plurality of sequencing reactions in parallel . In some embodiments, the array comprises a plurality of reaction wells arranged in a linear array. In some embodiments, the array comprises a plurality of reaction wells arranged in a 2- dimensional array of rows and columns. In some embodiments, reaction wells are spaced regularly, e.g., in a rectilinear pattern in which parallel rows are perpendicular to parallel columns (i.e., analogous to x and y axes that are 90 degrees apart). In some embodiments, the rows are not perpendicular to the columns. For example, the rows may be parallel to
each other, but the columns may extend at a non-90 degree angle, such as 45 or 60 degrees relative to the rows. In some embodiments, the reaction wells may be configured as a hexagonal array in which columns of wells extend from the rows at a 60 degree angle relative to the directions of the rows. In some embodiments, adjacent wells in each row are separated by the same distance from each other. In some embodiments, adjacent wells in each column are separated by the same distance from each other. In some embodiments, the spacing between adjacent wells in each row and column are separated by the same distance from each other. In some embodiments, the spacing between adjacent rows are different from the spacing between adjacent columns.
[0111] When the solid state substrate comprises a plurality of reaction wells, each well is preferably separated from all other wells by a distance that permits fluorescent signals to be unambiguously detected from each well, without substantial interference from fluorescent signals from any other wells. Usually, the minimum distance between adjacent wells depends on (1) the longest wavelength of fluorescent light being detected, and (2) the pixel resolution of the signal detector.
[0112] Optical resolution of light signals from two adjacent light sources is often considered to be achieved when the light sources are separated by a distance that is at least one half of the wavelength (X/2) of the detected light, even if the dimensions of light source are smaller than X/2 (e.g., when a reaction well has a diameter of 150 nm, 100 nm, or 80 nm). However, greater spacing may be preferred for better resolution to minimize cross-talk interference from light signals from adjacent wells. Thus, for fluorescent signals having a wavelength of 700 nm emanating from adjacent well, a minimum interwell distance of 350 nm (X/2) might be sufficient to provide adequate resolution of the two signals. However, a larger inter-well distance would likely improve signal resolution and detection accuracy.
[0113] The signal detector may have any suitable pixel resolution that is deemed appropriate by the user. For example, if each pixel of a signal detector has an area of 100 nm x 100 nm, and each reaction well has a diameter of 100 nm, then the light signals from each well are usually collected using a plurality of detector pixels for each well (e.g., a 3 x 3 pixel area, or 4 x 4 pixel area, or 5 x 5 pixel area, per well), to capture most or all of the photons emitted from each well. Generally, using a larger number of pixels for signal detection from a well will provide higher a photon yield (i.e., higher signal intensity) of fluorescent signals collected from each well, provided that the pixel area is not too close to the next adjacent well.
[0114] In some embodiments, reaction wells are separated by at least 1 micrometer, or by at least 1.3 micrometers, or by at least 1.5 micrometers, or by at least 1.7 micrometers, or by at least 2 micrometers. However, substrates having reaction well separation distances that are larger or smaller than these inter- well separation distances may also be used.
[0115] In some embodiments, the plurality of wells comprising an array of at least 10 times 10 reaction wells, or at least 30 times 30 reaction wells, or at least 100 times 100 reaction wells, or at least 500 times 500 reaction wells, or at least 1000 times 1000 reaction wells.
[0116] As noted above, reacting a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand with an exonuclease in a reaction well releases mononucleotides, which are fluorescently labeled mononucleotides or include fluorescently labeled mononucleotides, from the distal end of the strand. During the exonuclease reaction with the fluorescently labeled strand, the trans side of the substrate is illuminated with excitation light to create a fluorescence excitation zone adjacent to the distal opening of the reaction well, so that fluorescently labeled mononucleotides that diffuse through the excitation zone emit fluorescent signals that are detected as a function of time. Stated in a different way, the trans side of the substrate is illuminated with excitation light to create a fluorescence excitation zone adjacent to the distal opening of the reaction well. While the substrate is illuminated, the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is reacted with an exonuclease so that mononucleotides are released serially from the distal end of the strand and diffuse through the fluorescence excitation zone, so that fluorescently labeled mononucleotides in the excitation zone emit fluorescent signals.
[0117] The fluorescent signals are detected as a function of time, whereby a nucleotide sequence is determined from the time order of fluorescent signals detected from the released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides.
[0118] The production and detection of fluorescent signals may be accomplished using any suitable detector. The detector comprises an excitation source that emits light to illuminate one or more sequencing reaction wells at the same time or at different times. [0119] Typically, the excitation light comprises light that is monochromatic, i.e., the light comprises a narrow wavelength range. If the excitation source emits light that is not monochromatic, the light may be passed through one or more filters to block undesired wavelengths from impinging on the reaction wells. Exemplary light sources include lasers (e.g., argon lasers), light emitting diodes, laser diodes, and lamps, such as xenon and
mercury lamps. In some embodiments, the detector comprises one or more free space lasers. In some embodiments, the detector comprises one or more fibers coupled lasers. [0120] In some embodiments, the detector comprises a plurality of light sources, such as two or more lasers or light emitting diodes, each having a selected emission wavelength or emission wavelength range suitable for producing excitation light for exciting selected fluorescent labels of fluorescently labeled mononucleotides that diffuse through the excitation zone of each reaction well.
[0121] In some embodiments, the excitation light is circularly polarized. In some embodiments, the excitation light is linearly polarized. In some embodiments, the excitation light is non-polarized. In some embodiments, the excitation light comprises light having a wavelength of 488 nm. In some embodiments, the excitation light comprises light having a wavelength of 532 nm. In some embodiments, the excitation light comprises light having a wavelength of 640 nm. In some embodiments, the excitation light comprises light having a wavelength of 730 nm.
[0122] In some embodiments, the excitation light is collimated to illuminate one or more reaction wells, such a plurality of reaction wells that ay be configured as an array. In some embodiments, the excitation light is focused, such as in a confocal microscope configuration, which may be used for example for detection of fluorescent signals from a single reaction well.
[0123] For embodiments employing multiple fluorescent labels, i.e., when a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises different nucleotides comprising different identifying fluorescent labels, the excitation wavelengths may be tailored to balance the relative intensities of emitted light from the different fluorescent labels. Another way to balance the relative intensities of emitted light from the different fluorescent labels is to select the different fluorescent labels based upon the excitation wavelengths produced by the light source or light sources. For example, the intensity of a fluorescent signal emitted by a fluorescent label may be reduced by exciting the label at a wavelength that is shorter than the label’s wavelength of maximum absorption (/.max, abs) corresponding to the label’s fluorescence emission wavelength. The different fluorescent labels and light source(s) may also be selected to balance and optimize the resolution of emission signals of the different fluorescent labels. This can be accomplished by choosing labels with emission wavelengths that are as far apart from each other as deemed necessary to distinguish signals from the different labels. For example, in some embodiments, labels are chosen with emission wavelength maxima that are at least 20 nm,
or at least 25 nm, or at least 30 nm, greater or less than the nearest emission wavelength maxima of the other labels in the fluorescently labeled nucleotides. The choice of labels may also depend on the excitation wavelengths provided by the one or more light sources. [0124] Fluorescence detection may be accomplished using any of a variety of detection modes. Suitable light detectors include, for example, avalanche photodiode detectors; photomultipliers; charge-coupled devices (CCDs), such as intensified CCDs (iCCDs) and electron-multiplying CCDs (emCCDs); complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) detectors; confocal microscopes; and diode array detectors. Typically, detectors such as CCDs and diode arrays comprise a 2-dimensional array of pixels for collecting fluorescent signals from the reaction wells. As discussed above, the fluorescent signals from a reaction well are usually collected by multiple pixels in the detector, to maximize the collection of photons from that well so that each fluorescent label may be correctly identified. The pixels are usually designed to detect photons over a spectrum of wavelengths that encompass the wavelengths of all of the fluorescent labels that will be released by exonuclease cleavage of the fluorescently labeled strand.
[0125] Fluorescence signals are usually monitored continuously for greatest yield of the detected fluorescent signals. Fluorescence signals are detected and/or recorded using a frame rate that is faster than the duration of fluorescent signals emitted by each released mononucleotides passing through the excitation zone. The frame rate may be selected by taking into account fluorescent signal strengths and durations of individual photons or photon bursts emitted by the fluorescently labeled mononucleotides. Fluorescence signals are usually measured after subtraction of background/baseline fluorescence that is measured in the absence of fluorescent mononucleotides.
[0126] An exemplary solid state substrate comprising a reaction well of the invention is illustrated in the cross-sectional views in Figures 2A to 2D. Substrate 200 comprises a cis side 202a and a trans side 202b. Substrate 200 further comprises a reaction well 204 that defines a reaction volume 206. Reaction well 204 comprises (i) a proximal throughhole 208 extending between the cis side and the trans side of the substrate, (ii) one or more side walls 210a and 210b, and (iii) a distal opening 212. Proximal throughhole 208, which may be cylindrical or non-cylindrical, may be provided as an opening passing through a thin membrane layer 214.
[0127] Solid state substrate 200 further comprises an opaque metal layer 216 that substantially blocks excitation light from penetrating into the reaction volume and from penetrating from the trans side to the cis side of the substrate. Although Figures 2A-2D
depict a solid state substrate comprising a single opaque metal layer, the solid state substrate may comprise additional layers and materials, as discussed elsewhere herein. [0128] With reference to Figure 2A, reaction well 204 is cylindrical, although reaction wells may have other, non-cylindrical shapes. Reaction volume 206 is defined and enclosed by side walls 210a of layer 216, by side walls 210b of thin membrane layer 214, and by the diameter of the reaction well, which is indicated by a dotted horizontal doubleheaded arrow spanning distal opening 212. The depth of reaction well 204 is illustrated by a dotted vertical double-headed arrow 218.
[0129] The minimum diameter of each reaction well should be large enough to allow at least one exonuclease molecule to diffuse, from the trans side of the substrate, through the distal opening and into the reaction well, and to bind to and digest the distal end of the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand. Thus, the minimum diameter of each reaction well is or may be made to be at least as large as the smallest dimension or cross-section of the exonuclease that is used. For example, for an exonuclease having x-y-z dimensions of 6 nm x 6 nm x 6 nm, a minimum diameter of 50 nm or 100 nm or 150 nm are each sufficiently large to provide ample space for an exonuclease to diffuse into a reaction well and serially digest mononucleotides from the distal end of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand.
[0130] When an electric field is imposed across the substrate to influence the movement or position of carrier particles loaded with fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands, cis side 202a is associated with an anodic (negatively charged) electrode, and trans side 202b of substrate 200 is associated with a cathodic (positively charged) electrode.
[0131] The cis and trans sides of the solid substrate are contacted with one or more aqueous buffers. In some embodiments, the buffers on the cis and trans sides of the substrate may be the same except for the presence of carrier particles (if present) on the cis side and exonuclease molecules (if present) on the trans side. In other embodiments, the buffers on the cis and trans sides of the substrate are different from each other.
[0132] Buffer compositions are provided that are suitable for the sequencing methods of the present invention. Typically, buffers contain buffer molecules, such as HEPES, MOPS, Tris, and phosphate, for example, to maintain a selected pH (e.g., see Sigma- Aldrich Catalog regarding "Good buffers"). Buffer molecule concentrations of 5 mM to 100 m are typically useful, although higher or lower concentrations can also be used. Salts and other additives, such as NaCl, LiCl, KC1, and glycerol (e.g., 10 mM KC1 to 1 M
KC1 and/or 1-60 or 1-70 volume percent glycerol) and the like can also be included if desired, as well as appropriate cofactors for the particular enzymes that are used (e.g., MgCh or MnCh for some exonucleases). In some embodiments, buffer compositions are constituted to maintain the pH substantially constant at a value in the range of 6.0 to 8.8, although buffers with higher or lower pH values may also be used. For example, for exonuclease III and T4 exonuclease, Buffer 1 or Buffer 2 may be used as follows, in which DTT is dithio threitol, Ac is acetate, and BSA is bovine serum albumin: Buffer 1: 10 mM Bis-Tris-Propane-HCl, 10 mM MgCh, 1 mM DTT, pH 7.5 at 25°C. Buffer 2: 50 mM KAc, 20 mM Tris-Ac, 10 mM MgAc2, 100 pg/mL BSA, pH 7.9 at 25°C. [0133] Another buffer that may be used for T4 exonuclease is Buffer 3:
Buffer 3: 50 mM NaCl, 10 mM Tris-HCl, 10 mM MgCl2, 100 pg/mL BSA pH 7.9 at 25°C.
[0134] To deliver a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to a reaction well, an aqueous solution comprising one or more carrier particles, each comprising one or more attached fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands, is contacted with the cis side 202a of substrate 200. Each fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand comprises (i) a proximal end that is attached to the carrier particle, (ii) a distal end that is cleavable by an exonuclease, and (iii) at least one fluorescently labeled nucleotide comprising a fluorescent label. A voltage bias is applied across the substrate using a set of electrodes that establish an electric field from the cis to the trans side of the substrate, typically with one or more anodic electrodes (anodes) on the cis side and one or more cathodic electrodes (cathodes) on the trans side of the substrate. The electric field attracts a carrier particle to the throughhole of a reaction well, so that the distal end of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand on the carrier particle is drawn into and through the proximal throughhole into the reaction volume of a reaction well.
[0135] However, the carrier particle does not pass through the throughhole. Since the smallest dimensions of the carrier particles are larger than the smallest diameter of a throughhole, or the carrier particles are otherwise too large to pass through the throughhole, the carrier particles remain on the cis side of the substrate. Furthermore, when the throughholes are dimensioned to allow only one fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to enter each reaction well via a throughhole, or if the carrier particle has a sufficiently low loading density of fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands, only one fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is present in the reaction well for digestion by an exonuclease molecule.
[0136] The carrier particle and attached fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand may be held (maintained) in place by maintaining a mild voltage bias across the substrate (between the cis and trans sides) to keep the carrier particle adjacent to, or pressed against, the cis side of the throughhole. The carrier particle is not covalently bonded to the throughhole. The voltage bias is sufficiently mild that it does not cause the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand to be released from the carrier particle. The mild voltage bias may be the same as, or different from, the voltage bias that is used to attract the carrier particle to a throughhole to deliver an attached polynucleotide strand to a reaction well.
[0137] Figure 2B shows an exemplary reaction well in which a carrier particle 220 has been moved by an electric field (by a voltage bias) to a location adjacent to the cis side of throughhole 208. Carrier particle 220 comprises three fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands 222a, 222b, and 222c. Each strand is attached to the carrier particle by a proximal end, as illustrated for strand 222a by proximal end 224a, and a distal end that is cleavable by an exonuclease, as illustrated for strand 222a by distal end 226a. Strand 222a has a contiguous nucleotide sequence 5 ’ - ACTGGGTTCCAGTTACCCTGGA-3’ (SEQ ID NO.: 1), wherein the 5’-end is attached to carrier particle 220, and the 3 ’-adenylate (A) is the distal end. For Figures 2B to 2D, all of the nucleotides in strands 222a, 222b, and 222c are fluorescently labeled nucleotides each of which comprises a different fluorescent label that distinguishes each kind of nucleotide (A, C, G and T) from the other kinds of nucleotides.
[0138] Although strand 222a in Figure 2B is shown as having only a single-stranded form, it will be appreciated that a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand may instead be provided in double-stranded form, or may also comprise one or more single-stranded and double-stranded regions. For example, if fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand 222a were fully double-stranded, it would be hybridized to a complementary strand comprising the sequence 5’-TCCAGGGTAACTGGAACCCAGT-3’ (SEQ ID NO.: 2) as shown below, where base pairing between complementary nucleotides is represented by vertical lines:
5 ' -ACTGGGTTCCAGTTACCCTGGA-3 ' i m i n m i m i m i I I I
3 ' -TGACCCAAGGTCAATGGGACCT-5 '
[0139] As discussed above, if the distal end of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is double-stranded, then a double- strand- specific exonuclease may be used to cleave the distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand.
[0140] With continued reference to Figure 2B, an exonuclease may be introduced by contacting a second aqueous solution that comprises exonuclease molecules with trans side 202b of substrate 200 so that an exonuclease molecule, in this case a 3 ’-specific single-strand-cleaving exonuclease for cleaving strand 222a, can bind to the distal end of the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand in a reaction well, cleave mononucleotides and release them serially from the distal end of the strand. Exonuclease molecule 230 binds distal end 226a of polynucleotide strand 222a and cleaves the phosphodiester linkage (indicated by arrow 232a) between a 3 ’-terminal A nucleotide and an immediately adjacent G nucleotide.
[0141] During reaction of the exonuclease with the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand, the trans side of the substrate is illuminated with excitation light 240 to create a fluorescence excitation zone 250 adjacent to the distal opening of the reaction well. It should be noted that fluorescence excitation zone 250, which is illustrated as a shaded region spanning across the diameter of the distal opening and extending both outside and inside the reaction volume of the reaction well, does not have discrete boundaries. Rather, the intensity of incident light in the excitation zone is most concentrated in the vicinity of the distal opening, approximately as shown in Figure 2A, and rapidly diminishes at positions further within or outside of (above) the reaction well (for example, see Table 2 and related discussion above). However, the diameter of the excitation zone is the same, or substantially the same, as the diameter of the distal opening of the reaction well. In other words, the excitation zone does not extend to regions of the solid state substrate beyond the diameter of the distal opening. The 3-dimensional intensity profile of incident light for a reaction well will also depend on the composition(s) and other characteristics of the solid state substrate material(s) around the well (e.g., aluminum, gold, or other material). Thus, as used with reference to the present invention, “adjacent to the distal opening of the reaction well” is intended to refer to the space that is both immediately above and immediately below the plane that passes across the distal opening (and defines the distal end of the reaction volume), such as depicted edge-on by arrow 212 in Figure 2A, and any other nearby illuminated space within the reaction well that causes emission of detectable fluorescent signals by released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides diffusing through that space.
[0142] With reference to Figure 2C, a released mononucleotide 228a (shown as A*) diffuses out of the reaction volume and through fluorescence excitation zone 250. While in the excitation zone, fluorescently labeled mononucleotide 228a emits fluorescent signals in the form of multiple (a plurality of) photons (hv) that are detected as an adenylate mononucleotide by a detector (see Figure 2, discussed further below). Notably, passive diffusion provides a sufficient mechanism by which released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides can reach the excitation zone for fluorescence excitation and detection. There is no need for, and the present invention excludes, active bulk flow of aqueous solution into or out of the reaction well during exonuclease cleavage and detection.
[0143] Exonucleolytic cleavage and release of the initial 3 ’-terminal A mononucleotide from strand 222a produces shorter strand 222b having at its distal end a 3 ’-terminal G. Reaction of the distal end of strand 222b with exonuclease 230 cleaves the phosphodiester linkage (indicated by arrow 232b) between the 3 ’-terminal G nucleotide and an immediately adjacent G nucleotide, producing shorter strand 222c and a released mononucleotide 228b (shown as G*), as shown in Figure 2D. The released fluorescently labeled mononucleotide 228b diffuses out of the reaction volume and through fluorescence excitation zone 250, emitting fluorescent signals (hv) that are detected by a detector as a guanylate mononucleotide. Exonuclease 230 is then ready to cleave the next 3 ’-terminal mononucleotide from strand 222c in the same way as for the first two 3 ’-mononucleotides. [0144] As digestion continues along the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand, mononucleotides are released one-by-one, some of which (or all of which, in the case of strands 222abc in Figures 2B-2D) are fluorescently labeled mononucleotides. The released mononucleotides exit the reaction wells by diffusion at a rate that is much greater than the cleavage rate of the exonuclease, so that the released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides serially enter and pass through the excitation zone into bulk solution on the trans side of the reaction well. Unproductive diffusion of mononucleotides through the proximal throughhole is substantially avoided due to blockage of the proximal throughhole by the carrier particle that is attached to the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand.
[0145] If an exonuclease molecule dissociates from a fluorescently labeled strand before the fluorescently labeled strand has been completely digested, then another exonuclease from solution binds to the distal end of the fluorescently labeled strand and continues digestion. Digestion continues until the fluorescently labeled strand is so short that the exonuclease stops digesting the fluorescently labeled strand or until the cleavage reaction or illumination is otherwise terminated.
[0146] Exonuclease-mediated digestion of the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands is allowed to proceed for a selected digestion time, or until the yield of reliable fluorescent signals has diminished by a certain amount or below a selected minimum quantity threshold or quality threshold.
[0147] After exonuclease-mediated cleavage (also sometimes referred to as “exonuclease-mediated digestion” or “exonuclease digestion”) of the one or more fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands in one or more reaction wells is finished, the reaction wells may be re-loaded with new fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands by applying a reverse voltage bias to the substrate to move the carrier particle away from the throughholes, so that any remaining fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands are removed from the reaction volumes, and then applying a new voltage bias to (across) the substrate to reload each reaction well with a different fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands into each the reaction well (i.e., so that the distal end of a different fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand is delivered into each the reaction well) for reacting with an exonuclease. The new fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands that are loaded into the reaction wells may be from the same or different carrier particles relative to the carrier particles that provided fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands in the previous exonuclease cleavage round. Multiple rounds (cycles) of loading fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands into reaction wells and sequencing the strands using exonuclease- mediated cleavage may be performed until a desired amount of sequence data has been collected or until the sequencing cycles are no longer sufficiently productive.
[0148] In some embodiments, reaction wells are loaded with fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands using a voltage bias of about 250 mV to 500 mV to move the attached carrier particles to the throughholes of the reaction wells, although smaller or larger voltage biases may also be used. In some embodiments, carrier particles are held adjacent to the throughholes using a voltage of about 250 mV to 500 mV, although smaller or larger voltage biases can also be used. In some embodiments, carrier particles are moved away (‘ejected”) from reaction wells using a voltage bias of about -250 mV to -500 mV, although smaller or larger negative voltage biases may also be used.
[0149] One advantage of re-using the carrier particles to deliver multiples fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands to one or more reaction wells is that a large number of fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand can be sequenced from a single solid state substrate and single nucleic acid sample. Another advantage is that collecting sequence data from a greater proportion of the total nucleic acid sample population can
improve the completeness of the sequence data, reduce gaps, and/or increase the collection of redundant sequence data to align sequences and formulate optimal consensus sequences.
[0150] An exemplary sequencing apparatus 300 comprising a solid state substrate of the invention is illustrated in Figure 3. A substrate 302 having a cis side and a trans side is placed adjacent to a microscope objective lens 322, such that the trans side of the substrate faces the lens. Excitation light is delivered to, and fluorescent light signals are received from, the excitation zone of one or more reaction wells in substrate 302. Light paths are illustrated by dotted lines.
[0151] The apparatus also comprises excitation light sources 304a and 304b to provide excitation light having selected wavelengths, such as wavelengths of 532 nm and 640 nm, respectively, that are selected to excite fluorescent labels of mononucleotides that are released from a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand by exonuclease activity. Here, the apparatus comprises two fiber-coupled laser light sources 304a and 304b. Excitation light beams having different wavelengths from sources 304a and 304b are passed through wavelength combiner (WC) 306 (a fiber based wavelength combiner), fiber optic connector 308, collimating lens 310 (e.g., an achromatic doublet lens, Thorlabs #AC254- 060-A), optional shutter 311, and then through quarter wave plate 312 (e.g., an achromatic quarter wave plate, Thorlabs AQWP05M-600), to convert the linearly polarized beam from the lasers into a circularly polarized beam. The light then passes through focusing lens 314 (e.g., an achromatic doublet lens from Thorlabs AC254-400-A), to focus the beam to the back focal plane of the microscope objective lens, and then through multiband excitation filter 316 (e.g., from Chroma Technology ZET 532/640x). After passing through filter 316, the light is reflected off multiband dichroic beamsplitter 218 (e.g., Chroma Technology ZT 533/640rpc) to mirror 320, through microscope objective 322, and onto the trans side of substrate 301. In some embodiments, microscope objective 322 is an oil immersion microscope objective (e.g., Olympus APON60XOTIRF). In some embodiments, objective 322 is a water immersion microscope objective. In some embodiments, objective 322 is an air microscope objective.
[0152] Impingement of the excitation light on the trans side of substrate 300, particularly on the distal opening(s) of one or more reaction wells of substrate 300, creates fluorescence excitation zones (see Figures 2B-2D) that are adjacent to the distal openings of the reaction wells.
[0153] When fluorescently labeled mononucleotides are released serially from the distal end of a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand and diffuse out of the reaction volume through the distal opening of a reaction well, the mononucleotides diffuse through the excitation zone and emit fluorescent light in response to the excitation light. The emitted fluorescent light is collected and focused by microscope objective 322 and is reflected by mirror 320 through multiband dichroic beamsplitter 318, through multiband emission filter 324 (e.g., Chroma Technology ZET 532/640m) to dichroic beamsplitter 326 (e.g., Chroma Technology T6351pxr). In the apparatus of Figure 3, the emitted fluorescent light that passes through dichroic beamsplitter 326 is focuses by lens 328a (e.g., Olympus SWTLU-C tube lens) and then onto detector camera 330a for detection; and emitted fluorescent light that is reflected by dichroic beamsplitter 326 is focuses by lens 328b and then onto detector camera 330b for detection (e.g., Hamamatsu C13440- 20CU Orca Flash 4.0). Detector cameras 330a and 330b are preferably synchronized to properly detect the time order of fluorescent signals from the released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides.
[0154] For more colors, the two cameras may be replaced with a single camera, and a prism may be used instead of a focusing lens 328a, by which emitted light signals are angularly separated by wavelength onto different regions of the detector field for individual quantification and identification of nucleotide-specific fluorescent signals. Alternatively, a third and fourth camera may be included with attendant lenses and beam splitters to capture more than two different fluorescent signals.
[0155] Sequencing apparatus for use in the present invention may also comprise a computer and software for collecting and processing fluorescent signal data.
[0156] Since the portion of the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand that is in the reaction volume between the reaction well throughhole and the excitation zone is not substantially illuminated, the non-illuminated fluorescent nucleotides in that portion of the fluorescently labeled strand do not emit fluorescent light signals, or if they do, such signals are negligible. Only fluorescent mononucleotides that are excited while in the excitation zone emit a fluorescent signal that is detected by the detector. Also, if the distal opening is defined by a side wall comprising gold, then excitation intensity of the incident light may be greater than for aluminum, providing an enhancement of fluorescence, in other words, a greater flux of fluorescent photons for detection.
[0157] The excitation light that impinges on the distal openings of each reaction well may be oriented so as to be orthogonal to the substrate surface, in other words, parallel to
the central axis of each reaction well, e.g., when the reaction wells are cylindrical in shape. Alternatively, the excitation light that impinges on the distal opening of each reaction well may be oriented so as to be non-orthogonal to the substrate surface.
[0158] The wavelength of the excitation light is also selected to be compatible with the fluorescent labels of the released mononucleotides, so that when the excitation light impinges on each fluorescent label, the fluorescent label absorbs the excitation light and then emits photons having a wavelength that is longer (lower energy) than the wavelength of the excitation light. The difference between the wavelength of maximum absorption and the wavelength of maximum emission associated with a fluorescent label is known as the Stokes shift.
[0159] Fluorescence signals are detected using a detector frame rate that is faster than the shortest time windows during which fluorescently labeled mononucleotides emit individual photons or photon bursts while they diffuse through the excitation zone. Usually, released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides enter the excitation zone within 10, or within 20, or within 50 milliseconds, whereas they are released one-by-one by exonuclease-mediated cleavage at time intervals between about 100 milliseconds and about 10 seconds. Usually, released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides enter the excitation zone within 10 milliseconds after being cleaved from a fluorescently labeled strand. Frame rates may also be selected based in part on the size and speed of memory, signal to noise, and fluorescent signal strength.
[0160] Exonuclease cleavage rates and the diffusion times (or diffusion speeds) of released fluorescently labeled mononucleotides may be adjusted by varying reaction parameters such as pH, viscosity, temperature, and choice of exonuclease. For example, viscosity may be increased by including a viscous additive such as glycerol, e.g., at a concentration of from 1% to 60% (v:v), or from 1% to 70% (v:v), or from 50% to 70% (v:v), in an aqueous buffer on the trans side of the substrate. In some embodiments, an aqueous buffer on the trans side of the substrate comprises about 50% to about 60% glycerol (v:v), or about 50% to 70% (v:v), or about 50% glycerol (v:v), or about 60% glycerol (v:v), or about 70% glycerol (v:v). The presence of an increased viscosity in and around the detection zone can help reduce mononucleotide diffusion speeds (and provide longer mononucleotide dwell times) during fluorescence detection, providing several benefits, such as (1) higher fluorescence signals due to the collection of more emitted photons for each fluorescent mononucleotide passing through the detection zone, (2) higher signal to noise, (3) the ability to use lower laser power if desired, thereby
generating less heat, (4) less cross-contamination (if any) from fluorescent mononucleotides diffusing from a reaction well towards an adjacent reaction well, (5) and the ability to use place reaction wells more closely together in an array.
[0161] Each released fluorescently labeled mononucleotide may be identified (e.g., as A, C, G or T) from the characteristics of the measured fluorescent signal, such as (1) the particular emission wavelength or peak shape of fluorescence of the fluorescent label associated with each different kind of nucleotide, (2) signal intensity, which may be measured as a sum of multiple photons from the same mononucleotide during transit through the excitation zone of a reaction well, and (3) the absence of contributions of fluorescence signals from any other released mononucleotide. For example, fluorescently labeled mononucleotides that diffuse out of the excitation zone of a first reaction well into the excitation zone of a second reaction zone can be excluded from the fluorescent signals detected for the second well based on the trajectory of movement of the fluorescently labeled mononucleotide towards the second well. Similarly, fluorescently labeled mononucleotides that diffuse out of, and then return to, the excitation zone of a first reaction well can be excluded from the fluorescent signals detected for the first well based on the trajectory of movement of the fluorescently labeled mononucleotide returning towards the first well.
[0162] Also, the fluorescently labeled mononucleotides that are used in the present invention may be selected to be moderately susceptible to photobleaching under the illumination conditions of the substrate, so that fluorescently labeled mononucleotides that diffuse out of the excitation zone are substantially bleached, and thus rendered non- fluorescent, by the incident excitation light after the mononucleotide label has been detected in the excitation zone of the first reaction well, before it returns to the same excitation zone or diffuses to another excitation zone. Fluorescence signals from inactive reaction wells can be disregarded by computer software.
[0163] Sequences may be assembled from sequence data obtained from multiple polynucleotide fragments that contain the same or overlapping sequence regions. In some embodiments, determination of a polynucleotide sequence includes determining sequences of subsets of the full set of four natural nucleotides, A, C, G and T for DNA (or A, C, G or U for RNA), such as, for example, a sequence of only A's and C's of a target polynucleotide. In some embodiments, determination of a polynucleotide sequence includes the determination of the identities, order, and locations of one, two, three or all of the four types of nucleotides within a target polynucleotide. In some embodiments,
determination of a polynucleotide sequence includes the determination of the identities, order, and locations of two, three or all of the four types of nucleotides within a target polynucleotide. In some embodiments, determination of a polynucleotide sequence includes determining one or more subsequences of a target polynucleotide that serve as a fingerprint for the target polynucleotide, such as subsequences that uniquely identify a target polynucleotide, or a class of target polynucleotides, within a set of polynucleotides, e.g. all different RNA sequences expressed by a cell.
[0164] The present invention also provides kits that may be useful in performing methods of the invention. Generally, a kit may be any delivery system for delivering materials or reagents for carrying out a method of the invention. In the context of reaction assays, such delivery systems include systems that allow for the storage, transport, or delivery of reaction reagents (e.g., nucleotide 5 ’-triphosphates comprising fluorescent labels, such as mutually quenching fluorescent labels, enzymes, carrier particles, etc. in the appropriate containers) and/or supporting materials (e.g., buffers, written instructions for performing the assay etc.) from one location to another. For example, kits include one or more enclosures (e.g., boxes) containing the relevant reaction reagents and/or supporting materials. Such contents may be delivered to the intended recipient together or separately. For example, a first container may contain an enzyme for use in an assay, while a second or more containers contain mutually quenching fluorescent labels. In some embodiments, a kit may include one or more of the following: an exonuclease, a template-dependent DNA polymerase or RNA polymerase, one or more fluorescently labeled nucleotide 5’- triphosphates, buffers, and carrier particles that comprise affinity labels such as avidin, streptavidin, polynucleotides that are complementary to polynucleotides that are to be sequenced, etc.
Conjugation of Nucleic Acids to Carrier Particles
[0165] A. Selection and Design of DNA for Attachment to Carrier Particles. For direct conjugation of DNA to gold or silver nanoparticles or to gold or silver surfaces, single or multiple (2 - 6) thiol groups are attached on either the 3 ’ or 5 ’ end of the oligonucleotide (5’-GCTATGTGGCGCGGTATTAT-3’) (SEQ ID NO.: 3). Single thiols are obtained from commercially available precursors, 3’- or 5’- disulfide (CFbjn-S-S- (CH2)n-OH (n = 3 or 6) modified oligonucleotides (IDT, Iowa). Two thiol groups are introduced via conjugation of commercially available 3’- or 5’ - amino-functionalized
oligonucleotide (IDT, Iowa or TriLink) with (±)-a-lipoic acid. Alternatively, multiple thiols are introduced with 1, 2 or 3 consecutive DTPA phosphoramidites on either 3’- or 5 ’-end of oligonucleotide (IDT, Iowa). For conjugating DNA to functionalized nanoparticles, an appropriate complementary conjugation groups (amine, thiol, DBCO, BCN) is attached to either the 3’ or 5’ end of the oligonucleotide. Linkers of various lengths are introduced between the conjugation moiety and the oligonucleotide in order to facilitate access of enzymes (e.g., access to a polymerase if a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand complementary to a sample nucleic acid strand will be synthesized by DNA or RNA polymerase using a template that is immobilized on the carrier particle) oligonucleotides to the oligonucleotide sequence. Examples of linkers are thymidine monophosphate x n (n = 1 - 40), PEG3, PEG4, PEG5, and (PEG6-P(O)(OH)O-) x n (n = 1 - 12), where PEG means polyethylene glycol, and PEGN for N = 3, 4, 5 and 6 means a polymer of N ethylene glycol units.
[0166] B. Conjugation of DNA to Gold Nanoparticles. Oligonucleotides functionalized at 3’- or 5 ’-end with acyclic disulfide group (CH2)n-S-S-(CH2)n-OH (n = 3 or 6), 1, 2 or 3 DTPA (from IDT, Iowa) or (±)-a-lipoic acid are incubated with a 50-fold excess of a reducing agent (tris(2-carboxyethyl)phosphine (TCEP) or dithiothreitol (DTT) in phosphate buffer at pH 7.4 for 45 min. The reduced thiol-functionalized oligonucleotides are purified by desalting with gel filtration columns packed with Sephadex G-25 and milli-Q water as eluent.
[0167] Purified oligonucleotides are mixed with gold nanoparticles (10 nm, 15 nm, 50 nm, and 100 nm diameter from Sigma- Aldrich) at various molar ratios (100:1, 300:1, 500:1, 1000:1, 3000:1, 10000:1, 20000:1, etc.) and the pH is adjusted to 4.3 with 50 mM citrate-HCl buffer, or to pH 7.4 or pH 8 with 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer. Tween 20 is added to a final concentration of 0.02%, 0.05% or 0.1%, or instead of Tween 20, SDS is added to a final concentration of 0.01%, 0.025%, or 0.05%. After initial incubation at ambient temperature for 1 to 24 hours, 4 M NaCl is added in small portions up to 1 M total concentration. The reaction mixture is further incubated for 1 to 24 hours. Optionally, to block unreacted surface areas on the gold nanoparticles (also referred to as “back-filling”), a water-soluble oligo(ethylene glycol) -alkylthiol, where oligo(ethylene glycol) is PEG3 or PEG6, and alkyl is (CH2)s - (CH2)i2, is added to the reaction mixture (variable ratios relative to thiol-modified oligonucleotide: 1:1, 4:1, 10:1, 25:1, 100:1) and the reaction mixture is incubated for 15 min to 24 hours. Oligonucleotide-nanoparticle conjugates are harvested by centrifuging and multiple washing with appropriate buffer (e.g. 10 mM
phosphate buffer pH 8 with 0.02% Tween 20). Nanoparticles are stored at 4 °C in the same washing buffer before further use.
[0168] For quantitation of DNA loading, oligonucleotides are released from nanoparticles via etching with KCN I K3[Fe(CN)e] mixture or DTT. Released oligonucleotides are quantified with a fluorometer using SYBR™ Gold or OliGreen™ (ThermoFisher Scientific) as a staining agent. For internally labeled oligonucleotides that are obtained by primer extension in presence of at least one fluorescently labeled (Cy3, Cy5, Cy7, Alexa Fluor 488 etc.) deoxynucleotide triphosphate (dATP, dCTP, dGTP or dUTP), intrinsic absorbance or fluorescence is used as a readout for quantification after nucleotide release from nanoparticles. Alternatively, reversible hybridization of suitably labeled complementary oligonucleotide is used for quantification.
[0169] Table 4 shows DNA loading data obtained with carrier particles comprising different quantities of an oligonucleotide 5’- GCTATGTGGCGCGGTATTAT-3’ (SEQ ID NO: 3, supra) as a capture moiety and/or primer conjugated to gold nanoparticles for use in subsequent primer extension with fluorescent dNTPs or for annealing with primer extension products prepared separately.
*T4O is a 40-mer of thymidines; Au particle vendors were Sigma Aldrich (SA), Ted Pella (TP), and Cytodiagnostics (C); conjugation conditions were (1) phosphate pH 7.4 followed by IM NaCl overnight (salt aging), or (2) 50 mM citrate-HCl pH 4.3.
[0170] C. Amino-Functionalized DNA; Amide Coupling. Carboxylic acid- functionalized nanoparticles (commercially available quantum dots, polymer-coated gold or iron oxide nanoparticles - e.g., P/N 900226, 747254, 765481, 900475 from Sigma- Aldrich, P/N Q21301MP from ThermoFisher Scientific, P/N MP25-CA from Nanocs or P/N SC0050 from Ocean Nanotech) are suspended in sodium borate buffer (pH 8-9) and treated with N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N'-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (EDC-HC1; 100 - 2000 eq) and N-hydroxysulfosuccinimide (sulfo-NHS, 100-2000 eq) for 1 to 2 hours at ambient temperature. Then amino-functionalized DNA (1 eq) is added to the mixture. Optionally, 4M NaCl is added in small portions up to 0.15 M - 0.5 M (depending on the colloidal stability of particular nanoparticles). The reaction mixture is incubated for 3 to 24 hours. DNA-nanoparticle conjugates are purified by centrifuging and subsequent washing or by size-exclusion chromatography followed by dialysis.
[0171] D. DBCO or BCN-Functionalized DNA; Copper-Free Click Reaction Coupling. Carboxylic acid-functionalized nanoparticles (commercially available quantum dots, polymer-coated gold or iron oxide nanoparticles - e.g., P/N 900226, 747254, 765481, 900475 from Sigma- Aldrich; P/N Q21301MP from ThermoFisher Scientific; P/N MP25-CA from Nanocs or P/N SC0050 from Ocean Nanotech) are coupled with an appropriate azido-amine per the protocol above. Azido-functionalized nanoparticles (prepared above) are mixed with 3’ - or 5’ - DBCO (dibenzocyclooctyne)- or BCN (bicyclooctyne)-functionalized DNA (commercially available from IDT or prepared from 3’- or 5’ - amino-functionalized DNA via coupling with corresponding NHS ester, e.g. P/N A102 from Click Chemistry Tools or P/N BP-22851 from BroadPharm) in appropriate reaction buffer (10 mM - 50 mM sodium phosphate, pH 7 - pH 8). Optionally, 4 M NaCl is added in small portions up to 0.15 M - 0.5 M (depending on the colloidal stability of
particular nanoparticles). The reaction mixture is incubated for 3 to 24 hours. DNA- nanoparticle conjugates are purified by centrifuging and subsequent washing or by sizeexclusion chromatography followed by dialysis.
[0172] E. . Amine-functionalized nanoparticles (commercially available quantum dots, polymer-coated gold or iron oxide nanoparticles - e.g., P/N 900290, 765341, 747327 from Sigma Aldrich) are coupled with succinimidyl 4-(N-maleimidomethyl) cyclohexane- 1-carboxylate (SMCC) at pH 7.0 - pH 7.4 following an established protocol (e.g. Thermo Fisher). Maleimide-functionalized nanoparticles (commercial, e.g. 900461 from Sigma Aldrich, or prepared above) are mixed with thiol-functionalized DNA (deprotected with TCEP or DTT and purified as described above) in a 10 mM - 50 m sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0 - pH 7.4). Optionally, 4 M NaCl is added in small portions up to 0.15 M - 0.5 M (depending on the colloidal stability of particular nanoparticles). The reaction mixture is incubated for 0.5 - 24 hours. DNA-nanoparticle conjugates are purified by centrifuging and subsequent washing or by size-exclusion chromatography followed by dialysis.
Solid State Substrates
[0173] Substrate Preparation. A 300 pm thick 100 mm double- side-polished silicon wafer is prepared having a 30 nm layer of SiN deposited by low pressure chemical vapor deposition (LPCVD) on each side of the wafer (e.g., from Virginia Semiconductor, Fredericksburg, VA, or Rogue Valley, OR). Negative e-beam resist is spun on each side and the resist on one side (the “front” side) of the wafer is then exposed in an e-beam lithography (EBE) instrument to pattern reaction wells over the SiN layer on that side. The resist is then developed, and unexposed resist is removed. A 5 nm adhesion layer of chromium or titanium is deposited by e-beam evaporation onto the front side of the wafer, followed by e-beam deposition of a selected thickness of an opaque metal layer (e.g., 200 nm of Au or Al) onto the front side of the wafer. The wafer is then placed in a solution that removes the remaining exposed resist (a "lift off" step) from the front side, leaving reaction wells in the metal film layer that have diameters of 40 to 120 nm and well depths of 100 to 250, or other dimensions according to the preference of the user.
[0174] The back (non-patterned) side of the wafer is then patterned via conventional photolithography with a positive tone resist to expose a square window aligned with the front EBL features. These features are etched with reactive ion etch (RIE) through the SiN layer of the back side of the wafer down to the Si layer. The wafer is then mounted in
a holder with an O-ring that protects the metal-coated side from KOH solution and is then immersed in KOH solution, which preferentially etches down the (100) plane until the opposite SiN membrane is reached, resulting in a free-standing SiN + metal substrate with reaction wells on the front side of the wafer that are open down to the SiN layer.
[0175] Reaction Well- Aligned Throughhole Fabrication. The above-described substrate is then loaded into a focused ion beam (FIB) instrument (e.g., a Zeiss Orion NanoFab in GFIS mode with helium) to create throughholes at the base of each reaction well. Throughholes are milled in free-standing SiN membranes as described previously (Marshall et al., Direct and transmission milling of suspended silicon nitride membranes with a focused helium ion beam. Scanning 34: 101-106 (2012)). Briefly, the ion beam is aligned and the substrate to be milled is brought into focus on the tool. Throughholes are milled in the free-standing SiN layer of the substrate by exposing points or rastering over shapes in the substrate for a given dwell time and beam current relative to the thickness of the substrate, to target a desired final size and shape. Other tools capable of fabricating small throughholes include TEMs and other varieties of FIB (for example, gallium or gas field ion source (GFIS) neon). The throughholes may also be lithographically formed by overlaying a second EBL patterning step (as described in the above substrate preparation section) subsequent to creating the larger reaction well. Overlay of the second feature over the first feature yields a pattern consisting of the second feature (reaction well) concentrically aligned with the smaller first feature (throughhole). The resulting pattern may be used directly or, if the second feature is larger than a desired final size, it can be reduced with sub-nanometer precision by atomic layer deposition (ALD) of films such as HfO2, AI2O3, SiO2, TiO2, SiN, or Pt.
Detection of Exonucleolytically Released Mononucleotides
[0176] A. Formation of Fluorescently Labeled Polynucleotide Strand. Doublestranded fluorescently labeled DNA was prepared by template-dependent polymerase- mediated extension of a 5 ’-bis-biotinylated primer. The 5 ’-bis-biotinylated primer contained two biotin groups attached to its 5 ’ end to enhance non-covalent binding to streptavidin.
[0177] The structure of the bis-biotin moiety was the following, in which the 3’- phosphate is attached to the 5 ’-hydroxyl of the 5 ’-terminal nucleotide of the primer:
[0178] The nucleotide sequence of the primer was: 5’-(bis-biotin)-GCTATGTGGCGCGGTATTAG-3’ (SEQ ID NO.: 4).
[0179] The sequence of the hepatitis B virus (HBV) template (called “HBV- pos=1980”) was:
5’-GACTACTAGGTCTCTAGACGCTGGATCTTCCAAATTAACACCCACCCAGG TAGCTAGAGTCATTAGTTCCCCCCAGCAAAGAATTGCTTGCCTGAGTGCA GTATGGTGAGGTGAACAATGCTCAGGAGACTCTAAGGCTTCCCGATACAG AGCTGAGGCGGTATCTAGAAGATCTCGTACCTAATACCGCGCCACATAGC-3’
(SEQ ID NO.: 5).
[0180] The first 180 5 ’-nucleotides of the template corresponded to nucleotides 1980 to 2159 of the HBV genome. The last twenty 3’-terminal nucleotides (underlined) of the template were complementary to the primer sequence. The last five 3 ’-terminal nucleotides of the template were synthesized to contain phosphothioate internucleotide linkages to inhibit exonuclease degradation of the 3 ’-end of the template.
[0181] Template-dependent primer extension was performed in the presence of ATP, GTP, Cy3b-dCTP, and Cy5-dUTP under the following conditions: 20 mM Tris-HCl, 10 mM (NH4)2SO4, 10 mM KC1, 4 mM MgSO4, 0.1% Triton®-X-100, pH 8.8 at 25 °C, 1 mM DTT, 1% Formamide (v/v), 10% glycerol (v/v), 0.1 mM dNTPs, 0.8 micromolar DNA template, and 2 micromolar primer. This yielded a double- stranded nucleic acid comprising the HBV template sequence hybridized to the complementary primer extension product, wherein the primer extension product comprised a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand that contained fluorescently labeled cytidine and uridine bases.
[0182] The predicted sequence of the fluorescently labeled portion of the primer extension product, which corresponded to the complementary sequence of the first 180 5’- nucleotides of SEQ ID NO.: 5 (disregarding the first 5’-terminal 20 nucleotides, which were from the unlabeled primer), was: 5’-GUACGAGAUCUUCUAGAUACCGCCUCAGCUCUGUAUCGGGAAGCCUUAGA GUCUCCUGAGCAUUGUUCACCUCACCAUACUGCACUCAGGCAAGCAAUUC UUUGCUGGGGGGAACUAAUGACUCUAGCUACCUGGGUGGGUGUUAAUUUG GAAGAUCCAGCGUCUAGAGACCUAGUAGUC-3’ (SEQ ID NO.: 6).
[0183] B. Attachment of Fluorescently Labeled Polynucleotide Strand to Exemplary Carrier Particles. Streptavidin-coated iron oxide nanoparticles having average diameters of 50 nm (part number SV0050 from Ocean Nanotech) were mixed with the biotin- functionalized DNA in a reaction buffer (10 mM PBS pH 7.4, containing 10 mM sodium phosphate, 134 mM sodium chloride) at various molar ratios (10:1, 5:1, 2:1, and 1:1). Tween 20 was added to a final concentration of 0.01% (v/v), and the attachment (conjugation) reaction mixtures were incubated for 4 to 14 hours at 25 °C with shaking at 250 rpm. After the conjugation reactions were complete, the reaction mixtures were centrifuged at 15,000 rpm for 10 min, and the nanoparticle-free, DNA- containing supernatants were removed. DNA-nanoparticle conjugates were further purified by (1) centrifugation, (2) subsequent centrifugal washing with 10 m PBS buffer pH 7.4 containing 0.05% (v/v) Tween- 20, and (3) re-suspension in the same washing buffer. The DNA-conjugated nanoparticles were stored at 4 °C.
[0184] C. Loading of Fluorescently Labeled Polynucleotide Strand into Reaction Well. A solid state substrate comprising a cis side and a trans side was prepared using the techniques described above. The solid state substrate comprised a 4 x 4 square array of reaction wells having radially symmetric side walls with an internal diameter of ~40 nm, and a well depth of about 315 nm. The side walls of the reaction wells were formed by ion bombardment of a membrane defined within the substrate, the membrane comprising, from the trans side to the cis side, planar layers of (1) aluminum (250 nm), (2) titanium (15 nm), and (3) SiN (30 nm). In addition, the trans and cis sides of the membrane, and the inner side walls of the reaction well, were coated with a 10 nm thick coating of Si CL that was added by atomic layer deposition. In this example, the internal diameters of the proximal throughhole, the reaction volume surrounded by the radially symmetrical side wall, and the distal opening of each reaction well were approximately the same.
[0185] The reaction wells were separated from each other by a pitch of 1500 nm in the x and y directions. The solid state substrate was assembled in a sequencing cartridge such that the cis and trans sides of the substrate were fluidically accessible. The solid state substrate in the sequencing cartridge was positioned as shown schematically for substrate 202 in Figure 2, so that the distal openings of the reaction wells on the trans side of the solid state substrate were in the focus of the excitation laser beam that passed through microscope objective 222. The fluidic chamber close to the objective is referred to as trans chamber, and the distal chamber is referred to as the cis chamber. Each chamber was filled with a reaction buffer containing 20 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, lOmM MgCh, and then 25 pmole of DNA-conjugated carrier particles in the same buffer were added to the cis chamber (final concentration 100 pM nanoparticles with ~7 DNA strands/nanoparticle). [0186] The chambers were electrically connected via two electrodes (Ag/AgCh electrodes). These electrodes were used to apply a cis-to-trans 300 mV voltage bias across the substrate to electrophoretically transport the DNA-conjugated nanoparticles to the nanopore reaction wells, so that negatively charged fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands (hybridized to the complementary template strand in a dsDNA complex) attached to the carrier particles were electrophoretically drawn through the proximal throughholes and into the reaction volumes of the reaction wells.
[0187] Plugging of the proximal throughholes with carrier particles was monitored by measuring the cis-to-trans current from a starting (open, unplugged) current of approximately 1000 nAmp to a current below about 200 nAmp when the rate of change of the current had plateaued. Plugging of all 16 wells was complete in about 30 seconds. Because the diameters of the carrier particles were greater than the diameters of the reaction wells, the carrier particles were prevented from passing through the reaction wells from the cis side of the substrate to the trans side. In addition, because the carrier particles were sparsely loaded with fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands, no more than one fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand was loaded into each reaction well.
[0188] After the proximal throughholes of the reaction wells were plugged, and fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strands were loaded into the reaction wells, the trans chamber buffer was replaced with the following exonuclease reaction buffer: 20 mM Tris- HCl pH 7.5, 10 mM MgCh, 50% to 70% (v/v) glycerol, and 20 nM E. coli exonuclease III.
[0189] Immediately after introducing the exonuclease reaction buffer, laser illumination of the trans side of the substrate and camera recording of fluorescence
emissions from the distal ends of the reaction wells were started. Camera frame rates for emission signal detection was usually between 200 and 500 frames per second (fps), and laser light intensities at 535 nm and 648 nm were usually from 5 mWatt to 15 mWatt.
Protein Display Systems
[0190] In some embodiments, binding conjugates of the invention comprise protein display systems. Features of a peptide or protein display system are: 1) Tight linkage between an expressed protein and its encoding nucleic acid; and 2) Expression of the protein in a format that allows it to be assayed and separated based on some biochemical activity (for example, binding affinity, susceptibility to enzymatic action, or the like). Protein display systems can be separated into two groups based on the number of displayed proteins per display unit, that is, they are either polyvalent or monovalent. The polyvalent display systems such as yeast display, mammalian display systems and bacterial display systems express the gene(s) of interest (often diverse antibody libraries) as proteins tethered to the cell surface by means of a membrane anchor, similar to a native surface immunoglobulin found on the plasma membrane of normal B-cells. DNA encoding the library clones is transformed into the cell type of interest such that each cell receives at most one clone from the library. The resultant population of cells will each express tens to tens of thousands of copies of a single protein clone on their cell surfaces. This population of cells can then be exposed to limiting amounts of fluorescently labeled target antigen and the best binding clones will bind the most antigen and they can be identified and isolated using a fluorescence-activated cell sorter (FACS). Unfortunately accurate quantitation in polyvalent display systems is complicated by cooperative binding effects (avidity) between the multiple copies of the displayed molecule on the same cell. This problem is especially pronounced if the antigen is polyvalent (TNF, IgG) or bound to a cell surface (e.g. CD 20, CD3, GPCRs, ion channels, and the like).
[0191] Many of the viral and phage-based protein display systems are also polyvalent in nature, but the display units are too small to detect on the FACS, so accurate quantitation is even more difficult. These systems also suffer from avidity problems if multiple binding compounds are expressed simultaneously on the same phage/viral particle. Under such conditions it is difficult to determine whether an observed binding strength is due to the combined effect of two expressed binding compounds versus the effect of a single very high affinity binding compound. Such avidity problems may be
minimized by regulating the expression of candidate binding compound in a host using conventional techniques. In some embodiments in which a phage display system expresses Fab fragments, regulation of Fab expression is adjusted so that the fraction of phage expressing a Fab is in the range of from about .002 to .001, or in the range of about .001 to .0005.
[0192] The monovalent phage and viral systems, along with the ribosome display systems express an average of <1 molecule of the displayed molecule per display unit. These systems yield accurate measurements of the true affinity of the binding site in question for each clone in the library. Generally these systems are used to display large, diverse libraries of binding elements. Small subpopulations of clones are then selected from these libraries based on their increased ability to bind the target antigen relative to other members of the library. After selection (often multiple rounds of selection) the resultant clones are isolated and characterized (e.g. as disclosed in U.S. patent 7,662,557 which is incorporated herein by reference). The above protein display techniques are disclosed in the following exemplary references, which are incorporated herein by reference: (1) Wittrup, KD; Current Opinion in Biotechnology 12: 395-399 (2001) (Protein engineering by cell-surface display); (2) Lauren R. Pepper, Yong Ku Cho, Eric T. Boder and Eric V. Shusta; Combinatorial Chemistry & High Throughput Screening 11: 127-134 (2008); (3) Yoshiko Akamatsu, Kanokwan Pakabunto, Zhenghai Xu, Yin Zhang, Naoya Tsurushita; Journal of Immunological Methods 327: 40-52 (2007); (4) Chen Zhou, Frederick W. Jacobsen, Ling Cai, Qing Chen and Weyen David Shen; mAbs 2(5): 1-11 (2010); (5) Patrick S Daugherty; Current Opinion in Structural Biology 17:474^-80 (2007) (Protein engineering with bacterial display); (6) Clackson and Lowman (editors), Phage Display (2009); (7) Hennie R Hoogenboom, Andrew D Griffiths, Kevin S Johnson, David J Chiswell, Peter Hudson and Greg Winter; Nucleic Acids Research 19(15): 4133- 4137 (1991); (8) Francesca Gennari, Luciene Lopes, Els Verhoeyen, Wayne Marasco, Mary K. Collins; Human Gene Therapy 20: 554-562 (2009); (9) Christiane Schaffitzel, Jozef Hanes, Lutz Jermutus, Andreas Pluckthun; Journal of Immunological Methods 231: 119-135 (1999) (ribosome display); (10) Robert A Irving, Gregory Coia, Anthony Roberts, Stewart D Nuttall, Peter J Hudson; Journal of Immunological Methods 248: 31- 45 (2001) (ribosome display); (11) Arvind Rajpal, Nurten Beyaz, Lauric Haber, Guido Cappuccilli, Helena Yee, Ramesh R Bhatt, Toshihiko Takeuchi, Richard A Lerner, Roberto Crea; PNAS 102 (24): 8466-71(2005). Some of the above techniques are also
disclosed in the following patents, which are incorporated herein by reference: 7,662,557; 7,635,666; 7,195,866; 7,063,943; 6,916,605; and the like.
[0193] Further protein display systems for use with the invention include baculoviral display systems, adenoviral display systems, lentivirus display systems, retroviral display systems, SplitCore display systems, as disclosed in the following references: Sakihama et al, PLosOne 3(12): e4024 (2008); Makela et al, Combinatorial Chemistry & High Throughput Screening, 11: 86-98 (2008); Urano et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res Comm., 308: 191-196 (2003); Gennari et al, Human Gene Therapy, 20: 554-562 (2009); Taube et al, PLosOne, 3(9): e3181 (2008); Lim et al, Combinatorial Chemistry & High Throughput Screening, 11: 111-117 (2008); Urban et al, Chemical Biology, 6(1): 61-74 (2011); Buchholz et al, Combinatorial Chemistry & High Throughput Screening, 1: 99-110 (2008); Walker et al, Scientific Reports, 1(5): (14 June 2011); and the like.
[0194] In some embodiments, the invention employs conventional phage display systems for improving one or more properties of an antibody /protein binding compound, particularly a preexisting antibody /protein binding compound. Factors affecting such binding reactions are well-known in the art and include: the number of phage to include in the reaction, the stringency of the reaction mixture; the number of target molecules to include in the reaction; presence or absence of blocking agents, such as, bovine serum albumin, gelatin, casein, or the like, to reduce nonspecific binding; the length and stringency of a wash step to deplete poor binders and enrich good binders; the nature of an elution step to remove binders from the target molecules; the format of target molecules used in the reaction, which, for example, may be bound to a solid support or derivatized with a capture agent, e.g. biotin, and may be free in solution; the phage protein into which candidate binding compounds are inserted; and the like. In some embodiments, target molecules, such as proteins, are purified and directly immobilized on a solid support such as a bead or microtiter plate. This enables the physical separation of bound and unbound phage simply by washing the support. Numerous supports are available for this purpose, including modified affinity resins, glass beads, modified magnetic beads, plastic supports, and the like. Useful supports are those that have low background for nonspecific phage binding and that present the target molecules in a native configuration and at a desirable concentration.
[0195] In some embodiments, a nucleic acid-encoded binding compound is an antibody fragment (or antibody binding compound) expressed by a phage. In one embodiment, such phage is a filamentous bacteriophage and the antibody fragment is
expressed as part of a coat protein. In particular, such phage may be a member of the Ff class of bacteriophages. In a further embodiment, the host of such filamentous bacteriophage is E. coli. In another embodiment, a phagemid-helper phage system is used for displaying antibody fragments. Phagemids may be maintained as plasmids in a host bacteria and phage production induced by further infection with a helper phage.
Exemplary phagemids include pComb3 and its related family members, e.g. disclosed in Barbas et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 88: 7978-7982 (1991), and pHENl and its related family members, e.g. disclosed in Hoogenboom et al, Nucleic Acids Research, 19: 4133- 4137 (1991); and U.S. patent 5,969,108; 6,806,079; 7,662,557; and related patents, which are incorporated herein by reference. In a particular embodiment, an antibody fragment is expressed as a fusion protein with phage coat protein g3p.
[0196] This disclosure is not intended to be limited to the scope of the particular forms set forth, but is intended to cover alternatives, modifications, and equivalents of the variations described herein. Further, the scope of the disclosure fully encompasses other variations that may become apparent to those skilled in the art in view of this disclosure.
Definitions
[0197] “Antibody” or “immunoglobulin” means a protein, either natural or synthetically produced by recombinant or chemical means, that structurally is a member of immunoglobulin superfamily (although it may not be of natural origin) and that is capable of specifically binding to a particular antigen or antigenic determinant, which may be a target molecule as the term is used herein. Antibodies, e.g. IgG antibodies, are usually heterotetrameric glycoproteins of about 150,000 daltons, composed of two identical light (L) chains and two identical heavy (H) chains, as illustrated in Fig. 3. Each light chain is linked to a heavy chain by one covalent disulfide bond, while the number of disulfide linkages varies between the heavy chains of different immunoglobulin isotypes. Each heavy and light chain also has regularly spaced intra-chain disulfide bridges. Each heavy chain has at one end a variable domain (Vn) followed by a number of constant domains. Each light chain has a variable domain at one end (VL) and a. constant domain at its other end; the constant domain of the light chain is aligned with the first constant domain of the heavy chain, and the light chain variable domain is aligned with the variable domain of the heavy chain, as illustrated in Fig. 3. Typically the binding characteristics, e.g. specificity, affinity, and the like, of an antibody, or a binding compound derived from an antibody, are determined by amino acid residues in the Vn and VL regions, and especially in the CDR
subregions of the VH and VL regions. The constant domains are not involved directly in binding an antibody to an antigen. Depending on the amino acid sequence of the constant domain of their heavy chains, immunoglobulins can be assigned to different classes. There are five major classes of immunoglobulins: IgA, IgD, IgE, IgG, and IgM, and several of these can be further divided into subclasses (isotypes), e.g., IgG,, IgG2, IgG , IgG4, IgAi, and IgA2. “Antibody fragment”, and all grammatical variants thereof, (or its equivalent, “antibody binding compound”) as used herein are defined as a portion of an intact antibody comprising the antigen binding site or variable region of the intact antibody, wherein the portion is free of the constant heavy chain domains (i.e. CH2, CH3, and CH4, depending on antibody isotype) of the Fc region of the intact antibody. Examples of antibody fragments include Fab, Fab', Fab'-SH, F(ab')2, and Fv fragments; diabodies; any antibody fragment that is a polypeptide having a primary structure consisting of one uninterrupted sequence of contiguous amino acid residues (referred to herein as a “singlechain antibody fragment” or “single chain polypeptide”), including without limitation (1) single-chain Fv (scFv) molecules (2) single chain polypeptides containing only one light chain variable domain, or a fragment thereof that contains the three CDRs of the light chain variable domain, without an associated heavy chain moiety and (3) single chain polypeptides containing only one heavy chain variable region, or a fragment thereof containing the three CDRs of the heavy chain variable region, without an associated light chain moiety; and multispecific or multivalent structures formed from antibody fragments. The term “monoclonal antibody” (mAb) as used herein refers to an antibody obtained from a population of substantially homogeneous antibodies, i.e., the individual antibodies comprising the population are identical except for possible naturally occurring mutations that may be present in minor amounts. Monoclonal antibodies are highly specific, being directed against a single antigenic site. Furthermore, in contrast to conventional (polyclonal) antibody preparations which typically include different antibodies directed against different determinants (epitopes), each mAb is directed against a single determinant on the antigen.
[0198] “Binding compound” means a compound that is capable of specifically binding to a particular target molecule or group of target molecules. Examples of binding compounds include antibodies, receptors, transcription factors, signaling molecules, viral proteins, lectins, nucleic acids, aptamers, and the like, e.g. Sharon and Eis, Lectins, 2nd Edition (Springer, 2006); Klussmann, The Aptamer Handbook: Functional Oligonucleotides and Their Applications (John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2006). In one
aspect, binding compounds are proteins, such as antibodies or fragments thereof, receptors, signaling proteins, or the like. Mutants of protein binding compounds, sometimes referred to herein as “binding compound mutants,” “library variants,” or the like, are protein binding compounds that differ from a reference binding compound by one or more amino acid substitutions; in one aspect, each binding compound mutant differs from a reference binding compound by from 1 to 3 amino acid substitutions; and in a further aspect, each binding compound mutant differs from a reference binding compound by one amino acid substitution. As used herein, “antibody-based binding compound” or equivalently “antibody binding compound” means a binding compound derived from an antibody, such as an antibody fragment, including but not limited to, Fab, Fab', F(ab')2, and Fv fragments, or recombinant forms thereof. In one aspect, an antibody-based binding compound comprises a scaffold or framework region of an antibody and CDR regions of an antibody. In some embodiments, the binding characteristics of an antibody binding compound (e.g. affinity, specificity, etc.) are determined by such framework and CDR regions and such structures may be expression in various formats, that is, various antibody fragment types and various isotypes.
[0199] “Complementarity-determining region” or “CDR” means a short sequence (up to 13 to 18 amino acids) in the variable domains of immunoglobulins. The CDRs (six of which are present in IgG molecules) are the most variable part of immunoglobulins and contribute to their diversity by making specific contacts with a specific antigen, allowing immunoglobulins to recognize a vast repertoire of antigens with a high affinity, e.g. Beck et al, Nature Reviews Immunology, 10: 345-352 (2010).
[0200] “Complex” as used herein means an assemblage or aggregate of molecules in direct or indirect contact with one another. In one aspect, “contact,” or more particularly, “direct contact” in reference to a complex of molecules, or in reference to specificity or specific binding, means two or more molecules are close enough so that attractive noncovalent interactions, such as Van der Waal forces, hydrogen bonding, ionic and hydrophobic interactions, and the like, dominate the interaction of the molecules. In such an aspect, a complex of molecules is stable in that under assay conditions, the presence of the complex is thermodynamically favorable. As used herein, “complex” may refer to a stable aggregate of two or more proteins, which is equivalently referred to as a “proteinprotein complex.” A complex may also refer to an antibody bound to its corresponding antigen. Complexes of particular interest in the invention are protein-protein complexes and antibody-antigen complexes. As noted above, various types of noncovalent
interactions may contribute to antibody binding of antigen, including electrostatic forces, hydrogen bonds, van der Waals forces, and hydrophobic interactions. The relative importance of each of these depends on the structures of the binding site of the individual antibody and of the antigenic determinant. The strength of the binding between a single combining site of an antibody and an epitope of an antigen, which can be determined experimentally by equilibrium dialysis (e.g. Abbas et al (cited above)), is called the affinity of the antibody. The affinity is commonly represented by a dissociation constant (Kd), which describes the concentration of antigen that is required to occupy the combining sites of half the antibody molecules present in a solution of antibody. A smaller Kd indicates a stronger or higher affinity interaction, because a lower concentration of antigen is needed to occupy the sites. For antibodies specific for natural antigens, the Kd usually varies from about 10’7 M to 10’11 M. Serum from an immunized individual will contain a mixture of antibodies with different affinities for the antigen, depending primarily on the amino acid sequences of the CDRs.
[0201] “Nucleic acid” encompasses polynucleotides and oligonucleotides as defined below, which may be natural or artificial, of any length, single-stranded, double-stranded, triple-stranded, linear, circular, or branched, and which are exemplified by 2’ -deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), ribonucleic acid (RNA) (such as ribosomal RNAs, transfer RNAs, microRNAs,), DNA/RNA hybrids, and DNA-RNA chimeras. Nucleic acids usually contain one or more standard nucleotide bases, such as adenine, cytosine, guanine, thymine, and uracil, and analogs thereof, such that the bases are usually capable of basepairing with a base in an opposite base in a double strand form with complementary bases in a complementary strand.
[0202] “Phage display” is a technique by which variant polypeptides are displayed as fusion proteins to at least a portion of a coat protein on the surface of phage, e.g., filamentous phage, particles. A utility of phage display lies in the fact that large libraries of randomized protein variants can be rapidly and efficiently selected for those sequences that bind to a target molecule with high affinity. Display of peptide and protein libraries on phage has been used for screening millions of polypeptides for ones with specific binding properties. Polyvalent phage display methods have been used for displaying small random peptides and small proteins through fusions to either gene III or gene VIII of filamentous phage. Wells and Lowman, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol., 3:355-362 (1992), and references cited therein. In monovalent phage display, a protein or peptide library is fused to a gene III or a portion thereof, and expressed at low levels in the presence of wild type gene III
protein so that phage particles display one copy or none of the fusion proteins. Avidity effects are reduced relative to polyvalent phage so that selection is on the basis of intrinsic ligand affinity, and phagemid vectors are used, which simplify DNA manipulations. Lowman and Wells, Methods: A companion to Methods in Enzymology, 3:205-0216 (1991).
[0203] “Phagemid” means a plasmid vector having a bacterial origin of replication, e.g., ColEl, and a copy of an intergenic region of a bacteriophage. The phagemid may be used on any known bacteriophage, including filamentous bacteriophage and lambdoid bacteriophage. The plasmid will also generally contain a selectable marker for antibiotic resistance. Segments of DNA cloned into these vectors can be propagated as plasmids. When cells harboring these vectors are provided with all genes necessary for the production of phage particles, the mode of replication of the plasmid changes to rolling circle replication to generate copies of one strand of the plasmid DNA and package phage particles. The phagemid may form infectious or non-infectious phage particles. This term includes phagemids, which contain a phage coat protein gene or fragment thereof linked to a heterologous polypeptide gene as a gene fusion such that the heterologous polypeptide is displayed on the surface of the phage particle.
[0204] “Phage” or “phage vector” means a double stranded replicative form of a bacteriophage containing a heterologous gene and capable of replication. The phage vector has a phage origin of replication allowing phage replication and phage particle formation. The phage is preferably a filamentous bacteriophage, such as an Ml 3, fl, fd, Pf3 phage or a derivative thereof, or a lambdoid phage, such as lambda, 21, phi80, phi81, 82, 424, 434, etc., or a derivative thereof. .
[0205] “Polynucleotide” and “oligonucleotide” are used interchangeably and mean a linear polymer of nucleotide monomers or analogs thereof. Nucleotide monomers in polynucleotides and oligonucleotides are capable of specifically binding to a natural polynucleotide by way of a regular pattern of monomer-to-monomer interactions, such as Watson-Crick type of base pairing, base stacking, Hoogsteen or reverse Hoogsteen types of base pairing, or the like. Such monomers and their internucleosidic linkages may be naturally occurring or may be analogs thereof, e.g. naturally occurring or non-naturally occurring analogs. Non-naturally occurring analogs may include PNAs, phosphorothioate internucleosidic linkages, bases containing linking groups permitting the attachment of labels, such as fluorophores, or haptens, and the like. Whenever the use of an oligonucleotide or polynucleotide requires enzymatic processing, such as extension by a
polymerase, ligation by a ligase, digestion by an exonuclease, or the like, one of ordinary skill would understand that oligonucleotides or polynucleotides in those instances would not contain certain analogs of intemucleosidic linkages, sugar moieties, or bases at any or some positions. Polynucleotides typically range in size from a few monomeric units, e.g. 5-40, when they are usually referred to as “oligonucleotides,” to several thousand monomeric units. Whenever a polynucleotide or oligonucleotide is represented by a sequence of letters (upper or lower case), such as "ATGCCTG," it will be understood that the nucleotides are in 5'— >3' order from left to right and that "A" denotes deoxyadenosine, "C" denotes deoxycytidine, "G" denotes deoxyguanosine, and "T" denotes thymidine, “I” denotes deoxyinosine, “U” denotes uridine, unless otherwise indicated or obvious from context. Unless otherwise noted the terminology and atom numbering conventions will follow those disclosed in Strachan and Read, Human Molecular Genetics 2 (Wiley-Liss, New York, 1999). Usually polynucleotides comprise the four natural nucleosides (e.g. deoxyadenosine, deoxycytidine, deoxyguanosine, deoxythymidine for DNA or their ribose counterparts for RNA) linked by phosphodiester linkages; however, they may also comprise non-natural nucleotide analogs, e.g. including modified bases, sugars, or intemucleosidic linkages. It is clear to those skilled in the art that where an enzyme has specific oligonucleotide or polynucleotide substrate requirements for activity, e.g. single stranded DNA, RNA/DNA duplex, or the like, then selection of appropriate composition for the oligonucleotide or polynucleotide substrates is within the knowledge of one of ordinary skill, especially with guidance from treatises, such as Sambrook et al, Molecular Cloning, Second Edition (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, New York, 1989), and like references. Likewise, the oligonucleotide and polynucleotide may refer to either a single stranded form or a double stranded form (i.e. duplexes of an oligonucleotide or polynucleotide and its respective complement). It will be clear to one of ordinary skill which form or whether both forms are intended from the context of usage.
[0206] "Primer" means an oligonucleotide, either natural or synthetic, that is capable, upon forming a duplex with a polynucleotide template, of acting as a point of initiation of nucleic acid synthesis and being extended from its 3' end along the template so that an extended duplex is formed. Extension of a primer is usually carried out with a nucleic acid polymerase, such as a DNA or RNA polymerase. The sequence of nucleotides added in the extension process is determined by the sequence of the template polynucleotide. Usually primers are extended by a DNA polymerase. Primers usually have a length in the
range of from 14 to 40 nucleotides, or in the range of from 18 to 36 nucleotides. However, much longer primers may be also used. Primers are employed in a variety of nucleic amplification reactions, for example, linear amplification reactions using a single primer, or in polymerase chain reactions, employing two or more primers. Guidance for selecting the lengths and sequences of primers for particular applications is known to those of ordinary skill in the art, as evidenced for example by Dieffenbach, editor, PCR Primer: A Laboratory Manual, 2nd Edition (Cold Spring Harbor Press, New York, 2003).
[0207] “Readout” means a characteristic or physical property of one or more signal generation moieties, or labels, that are measured, detected, and/or counted and that can be converted to a number or value. In one aspect, a readout of an assay is obtained by the use or application of a instrument and/or process that converts assay results on the molecular level into signals that may be detected and recorded. Such instrument or process may be referred to as a “readout device” (or instrument) or “readout process” (or method). A readout can also include, or refer to, an actual numerical representation of such collected or recorded data. For example, a readout of a nanopore sequencing method may be a fluorescent signal from a labeled nucleotide.
[0208] "Sequence determination", "sequencing", "determining a nucleotide sequence", "determining a polynucleotide sequence", and similar terms, when referring to polynucleotides, includes the determination of partial or full nucleotide sequence information of one or more polynucleotides. These terms also include determining sequences of subsets of the full set of four natural nucleotides, A, C, G and T for DNA (or A, C, G or U for RNA), such as, for example, a sequence of only A's and C's of a target polynucleotide. These terms also include the determination of the identities, order, and locations of one, two, three or all of the four types of nucleotides within a target polynucleotide. In some embodiments, the terms include the determination of the identities, order, and locations of two, three or all of the four types of nucleotides within a target polynucleotide. In some embodiments sequence determination may be accomplished by identifying the order and locations of a single type of nucleotide, e.g. cytosines, within the target polynucleotide "catcgc . . . " so that its sequence is represented as a binary code, e.g. "100101 . . . " representing "c-(not c)(not c)c-(not c)-c . . . " and the like. In some embodiments, these terms may also include subsequences of a target polynucleotide that serve as a fingerprint for the target polynucleotide; that is, subsequences that uniquely identify a target polynucleotide, or a class of target
polynucleotides, within a set of polynucleotides, e.g. all different RNA sequences expressed by a cell.
[0209] “Specific” or “specificity” in reference to the binding of one molecule to another molecule, such as a labeled target sequence for a probe, means the recognition, contact, and formation of a stable complex between the two molecules, together with substantially less recognition, contact, or complex formation of that molecule with other molecules. In one aspect, “specific” in reference to the binding of a first molecule to a second molecule means that to the extent the first molecule recognizes and forms a complex with another molecule in a reaction or sample, it forms the largest number of the complexes with the second molecule. Preferably, this largest number is at least fifty percent. Generally, molecules involved in a specific binding event have areas on their surfaces or in cavities giving rise to specific recognition between the molecules binding to each other. Examples of specific binding include antibody-antigen interactions, enzymesubstrate interactions, formation of duplexes or triplexes among polynucleotides and/or oligonucleotides, receptor-ligand interactions, and the like. As used herein, “contact” in reference to specificity or specific binding means two molecules are close enough that weak noncovalent chemical interactions, such as Van der Waal forces, hydrogen bonding, base-stacking interactions, ionic and hydrophobic interactions, and the like, dominate the interaction of the molecules.
[0210] “Target polynucleotide” means a polynucleotide, or a segment of a polynucleotide, whose sequence is to be determined. If a target polynucleotide is doublestranded, then determination of a sequence of one strand of the target polynucleotide will reveal the sequence of the corresponding complementary strand, based on Watson and Crick base-pairing rules. If a target polynucleotide is single- stranded (or is intended to refer to a single strand in a double stranded nucleic acid), then determining a sequence of a strand that is complementary to the target polynucleotide (e.g., the sequence of a cDNA prepared by reverse transcription of a target RNA polynucleotide) will reveal the sequence of the target polynucleotide. Thus, depending on the context of how “target” is used, a target polynucleotide may be considered to be the a fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand whose sequence is determined directly from a sequence of mononucleotides released serially by exonuclease-mediated digestion, or a target polynucleotide may be considered to be a polynucleotide strand whose sequence is complementary to a sequence of the fluorescently labeled polynucleotide strand.
[0211] “Sample” (or “biological sample” which is used synonymously) means a quantity of material from a biological, environmental, medical, or patient source in which detection or measurement of target biomolecule, such as a target nucleic acids, is sought. On the one hand it is meant to include a specimen or culture (e.g., microbiological cultures). On the other hand, it is meant to include both biological and environmental samples. A sample may include a specimen of synthetic origin. Biological samples may be animal, including human, fluid, solid (e.g., stool) or tissue, such as, fluids from nasal or other schwabs, as well as liquid and solid food and feed products and ingredients such as dairy items, vegetables, meat and meat by-products, and waste. Biological samples may include materials taken from a patient including, but not limited to cultures, blood, saliva, tears, sweat, urine, cerebral spinal fluid, pleural fluid, milk, lymph, sputum, semen, needle aspirates, and the like. Environmental samples include environmental material such as surface matter, soil, water and industrial samples, as well as samples obtained from food and dairy processing instruments, apparatus, equipment, utensils, disposable and nondisposable items. These examples are not to be construed as limiting the sample types applicable to the present invention.
“Wild type” or “reference” or “pre-existing” in reference to a binding compound are used synonymously to mean a compound which is being analyzed or improved in accordance with the method of the invention. That is, such a compound serves as a starting material from which variant polypeptides are derived through the introduction of mutations. A “wild type” sequence for a given protein is usually the sequence that is most common in nature, but the term is used more broadly here to include compounds that have been engineered. Similarly, a “wild type” gene sequence is typically the sequence for that gene which is most commonly found in nature, but the usage here includes genes that may have been engineered from a natural compound, e.g. a gene which has been engineered to consist of bacterial codons even though it encodes a human protein. Mutations may be introduced into a “wild type” gene (and thus the protein it encodes) through any available process, e.g. site-specific mutation, insertion of chemically synthesized segments, or other conventional means. The products of such processes are “variant” or “mutant” forms of the original “wild type” protein or gene. Exemplary reference (or wild type or preexisting) sequences include antibody-targeted drugs or antibody-based drugs such as adalimumab (Humira), bevacizumab (Avastin), cetuximab (Erbitux), efalizumab (Raptiva), infliximab (Remicade), panitumumab (Vectubix), ranibuzumab (Lucentis), rituximab (Rituxan), trastuzumab (Herceptin), and the like.
Claims
1. A method of detecting binding of predetermined binding conjugates to one or more target molecules, the method comprising the steps of:
(a) combining in a reaction mixture a sample containing one or more target molecules and at least one predetermined binding conjugate under conditions that permit at least one predetermined binding conjugate to specifically bind to a target molecule, wherein each binding conjugate comprises: (A) a binding compound and (B) a polynucleotide linked to the binding compound, wherein the polynucleotide has a nucleotide sequence which identifies the binding compound and whose nucleotides are labeled, or capable of being labeled, by distinguishable fluorescent dyes;
(b) separating unbound binding conjugates from binding conjugates specifically bound to target molecules;
(c) releasing the polynucleotides from the bound binding conjugates; and
(d) identifying the presence or quantity of the binding compounds by sequencing the released polynucleotides with the following steps:
(i) translocating through one or more nanopores the labeled oligonucleotide barcodes, wherein each nanopore comprises a passage through an insulative layer and an opaque layer, the passage through the opaque layer having a diameter;
(ii) illuminating the passage from the direction of the opaque layer with a light beam having a wavelength greater than the diameter of the passage through the opaque layer, so that an excitation zone of non-propagating light is created within the passage through the opaque layer;
(iii) digesting the labeled oligonucleotide barcodes in the passage outside of the excitation zone to release labeled nucleotides one at a time at a rate less than the expected time of diffusion of the released labeled nucleotides out of the passage;
(iv) identifying each released labeled nucleotide by detecting the signal generated by its label as the released labeled nucleotide diffuses out of the passage through the excitation zone; thereby identifying binding conjugates bound to target analytes.
2. The method of claim 1 wherein said polynucleotide of said predetermined binding conjugate is attached to a carrier particle.
68
3. The method of claim 2 wherein each said binding compounds of said predetermined binding conjugates is specific for a different epitope of said one or more target molecules and wherein said polynucleotide is a barcode having a nucleotide sequence from which one of said one or more target molecules is identified.
4. A method of detecting the presence or quantity of one or more target molecules in a sample, the method comprising the steps of:
(a) combining in a reaction mixture a sample and at least one binding conjugate under conditions that permit at least one binding conjugate to specifically bind to a target molecule, wherein each binding conjugate comprises: (A) a binding compound specific for a target molecule, and (B) an oligonucleotide barcode linked to the binding compound, wherein the oligonucleotide barcode has a nucleotide sequence which identifies the target molecule and whose nucleotides are labeled, or capable of being labeled, by distinguishable fluorescent dyes;
(b) separating unbound binding conjugates from binding conjugates specifically bound to target molecules;
(c) releasing the oligonucleotide barcodes from the bound binding conjugates; and
(d) identifying the presence or quantity of the one or more target molecules by sequencing the oligonucleotide barcodes with the following steps:
(i) translocating through one or more nanopores the labeled oligonucleotide barcodes, wherein each nanopore comprises a passage through an insulative layer and an opaque layer, the passage through the opaque layer having a diameter;
(ii) illuminating the passage from the direction of the opaque layer with a light beam having a wavelength greater than the diameter of the passage through the opaque layer, so that an excitation zone of non-propagating light is created within the passage through the opaque layer;
(iii) digesting the labeled oligonucleotide barcodes in the passage outside of the excitation zone to release labeled nucleotides one at a time at a rate less than the expected time of diffusion of the released labeled nucleotides out of the passage;
(iv) identifying each released labeled nucleotide by detecting the signal generated by its label as the released labeled nucleotide diffuses out of the passage through the excitation zone; thereby identifying binding conjugates bound to target analytes.
69
5. The method of claim 4 wherein said oligonucleotide barcode of said binding conjugate is attached to a carrier particle.
6. The method of claim 4 wherein said one or more target molecules are a plurality of target molecules.
7. The method of claim 6 wherein said plurality of target molecules is in the range of from 2 to 500 target molecules and wherein said binding compounds are antibody binding compounds.
8. The method of claim 7 wherein said plurality of target molecules is in the range of from 2 to 50 target molecules.
70
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US202163260343P | 2021-08-17 | 2021-08-17 | |
US63/260,343 | 2021-08-17 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2023023561A1 true WO2023023561A1 (en) | 2023-02-23 |
Family
ID=85241013
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/US2022/075093 WO2023023561A1 (en) | 2021-08-17 | 2022-08-17 | Multiplex binding assays with optical nanopore readout |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
WO (1) | WO2023023561A1 (en) |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20170044606A1 (en) * | 2015-08-12 | 2017-02-16 | The Chinese University Of Hong Kong | Single-molecule sequencing of plasma dna |
US20190002971A1 (en) * | 2016-01-15 | 2019-01-03 | Quantapore, Inc. | Optically-based nanopore analysis with reduced background |
US20190310245A1 (en) * | 2018-04-06 | 2019-10-10 | Northeastern University | System and Method for Identifying and Quantifying Species with Nanopores, using Complexes of Nanoparticles with Carrier Particles |
US20200024654A1 (en) * | 2016-09-29 | 2020-01-23 | Oxford Nanopore Technologies Limited | Method for nucleic acid detection by guiding through a nanopore |
US20210199641A1 (en) * | 2018-07-23 | 2021-07-01 | The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York | Single-molecule electronic multiplex nanopore immunoassays for biomarker detection |
-
2022
- 2022-08-17 WO PCT/US2022/075093 patent/WO2023023561A1/en unknown
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20170044606A1 (en) * | 2015-08-12 | 2017-02-16 | The Chinese University Of Hong Kong | Single-molecule sequencing of plasma dna |
US20190002971A1 (en) * | 2016-01-15 | 2019-01-03 | Quantapore, Inc. | Optically-based nanopore analysis with reduced background |
US20200024654A1 (en) * | 2016-09-29 | 2020-01-23 | Oxford Nanopore Technologies Limited | Method for nucleic acid detection by guiding through a nanopore |
US20190310245A1 (en) * | 2018-04-06 | 2019-10-10 | Northeastern University | System and Method for Identifying and Quantifying Species with Nanopores, using Complexes of Nanoparticles with Carrier Particles |
US20210199641A1 (en) * | 2018-07-23 | 2021-07-01 | The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York | Single-molecule electronic multiplex nanopore immunoassays for biomarker detection |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20240254475A1 (en) | Proteomic analysis with nucleic acid identifiers | |
US11946929B2 (en) | Sandwich assays in droplets | |
KR102673492B1 (en) | Cellularly processable nucleic acid sequence analysis method | |
US11841371B2 (en) | Proteomics and spatial patterning using antenna networks | |
US10768173B1 (en) | Multivalent binding composition for nucleic acid analysis | |
US11268137B2 (en) | Linked ligation | |
CN106460034B (en) | Single molecule analysis with high accuracy | |
TW202138565A (en) | Nanoparticle with single site for template polynucleotide attachment | |
US20220106629A1 (en) | Method of translocating nucleic acids through nanopores | |
US20120135410A1 (en) | Method for imaging on thin solid-state interface between two fluids | |
US12098419B2 (en) | Linked target capture and ligation | |
WO2023023561A1 (en) | Multiplex binding assays with optical nanopore readout | |
US20230193376A1 (en) | Fluorescent polynucleotide sequencing methods and compositions | |
EP3464612B1 (en) | Two-color nanopore sequencing | |
CN117813391A (en) | Method for preparing substrate surface for DNA sequencing | |
Sze | Selective single molecule sensing in nanopore |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 22859355 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |